cadillac escalade/escalade esv owner manual - …...cadillac escalade/escalade esv owner manual -...

Black plate (1,1)Cadillac Escalade/Escalade ESV Owner Manual - 2011

2011 Cadillac Escalade/Escalade ESV Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40Universal Remote System . . . . 5-50

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-33Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-30Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-40Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-47Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-54Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-82

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97


2011 Cadillac Escalade/Escalade ESV Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names,and vehicle body designs appearingin this manual including, but notlimited to, GM, the GM logo,CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crestand Wreath, ESCALADE, andESV are trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchaseor due to changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forCadillac Motor Division whereverit appears in this manual.

If the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25965920 A First Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate informationabout the vehicle, use the Indexin the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page numberwhere it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could resultin property or vehicle damage.This would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through itis a safety symbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or“Do not let this happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Sensing System forPassenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-20Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Universal Remote System . . . 1-21

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-21Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-22Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-23Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

United States Version Shown; Canada Similar.


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑8.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑8.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5.

C. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑12.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑8.

E. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑40.

Driver Shift Control (DSC).See Manual Mode onpage 9‑43.

F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑43.

G. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑26.

H. Clock on page 5‑8.

I. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑10.

J. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑47.

Rear Park Aid Disable Button.See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑54.

K. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

L. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

M. Dome Lamp Override.See Dome Lamps onpage 6‑10.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑9.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑9.

N. Data Link Connector (DLC).See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑18.

O. Automatic Transfer CaseControl (Hybrid only). See thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

P. Cruise Control on page 9‑51.

Heated Steering Wheel onpage 5‑5 (If Equipped).

Q. Horn on page 5‑5.

R. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3.

S. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

T. Pedal Adjust Button.See Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal on page 9‑31.

Power Assist Steps onpage 2‑13 (If Equipped).

U. Glove Box on page 4‑1.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within 3 seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback canbe personalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40.

Press and hold& to open orclose the liftgate.

Press and holdm to open theliftglass.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold forthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.


In Brief 1-5

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.

Door LocksThere are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteror the key in the driver door. Frominside, use the power door locks orthe manual door locks. To lock orunlock the door with the manuallocks, push down or pull up onthe manual lock knob.

Power Door Locks

If available, these switches are onthe front doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2‑7.


1-6 In Brief

Liftgate

Power Liftgate

Press K on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or use thepower door lock switches to unlockthe liftgate.

There are several ways to open andclose the power liftgate:

. Press and hold& on the RKEtransmitter until the liftgate startsmoving.

. Press& on the overheadconsole inside the vehicle.

. Press the touchpad switch (B)on the outside liftgate handleto open.

. Press thel button next to theliftgate latch to close.

To disable the power liftgatefunction, press OFF on theoverhead console.

Liftglass

There are two ways to unlatch theliftglass:. Press the button on the

underside of the license plateapplique (A).

. Pressm on the RKEtransmitter.

See Liftgate (Manual) on page 2‑9or Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑10.

Windows

The power window switchesare located on the driver door.In addition, each passenger doorhas a switch for its own window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see:. Windows on page 2‑19.. Power Windows on page 2‑20.


In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the entire control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3 for more information.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:. To increase or decrease lumbar

support, press and hold the frontor rear of the control.

. To raise or lower the height ofthe support, press and hold thetop or bottom of the control.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑6 for more information.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑6 for more information.


1-8 In Brief

Memory Features

The controls on the driver door areused to program and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power steering column, andthe adjustable throttle and brakepedals.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, includingthe seatback recliner andlumbar, both outside mirrors,power steering column, and thethrottle and brake pedals.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16and Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal on page 9‑31 formore information.

Not all mirrors and adjustablethrottles and brake pedals willhave the ability to save andrecall their positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1” or“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).A single beep will sound. The seat,

outside mirrors, steering column,and adjustable throttle and brakepedals will move to the positionspreviously stored for the identifieddriver.

See “Memory Features” underPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information.

Easy Exit Positions

This feature can move the driverseat rearward and the powersteering column up and forward toallow extra room to exit the vehicle.

B : Press to recall the easy exitpositions. The vehicle must be inP (Park).

See “Memory Features” underPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information.


In Brief 1-9

Second Row SeatsOn vehicles with a 60/40 split benchor buckets seats, the seatbackscan be folded for additional cargospace, or the seats can be foldedand tumbled for easy entry/exit tothe third row seats, if equipped.On vehicles with bucket seats,the seatbacks also recline.

See Second Row Seats (60/40 SplitBench Seat) on page 3‑10 orSecond Row Seats (Bucket Seats)on page 3‑13 for more information.

Third Row SeatsOn vehicles with third row seats,the seatbacks can be folded, andthe entire seat can be tumbled orremoved from the vehicle.

For detailed instructions, see ThirdRow Seats on page 3‑18.

Heated and VentilatedSeats

The buttons are on the climatecontrol panel.

{ : Press to cool the entire seat.

+ : Press to heat theseatback only.

z : Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Repeatedly press and release thedesired button to cycle through thetemperature settings.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑8.

Rear Seats

The buttons are on the Rear SearAudio (RSA) panel.

M : Press to heat the seatcushion and to cycle throughthe temperature settings.

See Heated Rear Seats onpage 3‑9.


1-10 In Brief

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑22.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑25.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑31.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑63.

Sensing System forPassenger AirbagThe passenger sensing system,if equipped, will turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. The driverairbags, seat‐mounted side impactairbags and roof‐rail airbags are notaffected by this.

If the vehicle has one of theindicators pictured in the followingillustrations, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position.

The passenger airbag statusindicator, if equipped, will be visibleon the overhead console when thevehicle is started.


In Brief 1-11

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑48 for important information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with outside power mirrorsand foldaway mirrors have controlson the driver door.

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows onthe control pad to adjust themirror.

3. Press the opposite side to getthe control pad to a neutralposition.

Power Foldaway Mirrors

To fold the mirrors:

1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Interior Mirror

The automatic dimming rearviewmirror reduces the glare oflights from behind the vehicle.The dimming feature comes onand the indicator light illuminateseach time the vehicle is started.

O : Press to turn the dimmingfeature on or off.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑18 for moreinformation.


1-12 In Brief

Steering WheelAdjustment

The power tilt wheel control islocated on the left side of thesteering column.

Push the control up or down to tiltthe steering wheel up or down.

To set the memory position, see“Memory Features” in Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentThe vehicle has adjustable throttleand brake pedals that allow you tochange their positions.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is located on the centerconsole below the climate controlsystem.

Press the right and left arrows tomove the pedals either closer orfurther from your body.

Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedalon page 9‑31

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in theoverhead console.

They come on when any door isopened and turn off after all thedoors are closed.

Turn the instrument panelbrightness knob located belowthe dome lamp override button,clockwise to the farthest position tomanually turn on the dome lamps.The dome lamps remain on until theknob is turned counterclockwise.


In Brief 1-13

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

k : Press the button in and thedome lamps remain off when a dooris opened. Press the button again toreturn it to the extended position sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with reading lamps inthe overhead console, press thebutton located next to the lamp toturn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

For more information about interiorlamps, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑10.. Reading Lamps on page 6‑10.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑9.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

P : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlamps andDRL back on.


1-14 In Brief

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.

AUTO: Automatically turns on theheadlamps at normal brightness,along with the parking lamps,instrument panel lights, licenseplate lamps, and taillamps.

;: Turns on the parking lamps,along with the instrument panellights, license plate lamps, andtaillamps.

2: Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, instrument panellights, license plate lamps, andtaillamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑6.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑9.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

8 : Single wipe, turn to8, thenrelease. Several wipes, hold theband on8 longer.

9 : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

6 : Slow wipes.

? : Fast wipes.

L : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

Rear Wiper Window Wiper/Washer

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

9 : Turns the wiper off.

5 : Turns on the rear wiper delay.

Z : Turns on the rear wiper.

= : Press the button on the end ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe rear window.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑6.


In Brief 1-15

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Climate Control with Cooled and Heated Seats shown

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Air Recirculation

E. Rear Window Defogger

F. Air Conditioning

G. Heated and Cooled Seats

H. Fan Control

I. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

J. Air Delivery Mode Control

See Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑1 andRear Climate Control System (RearClimate with Rear Seat Audio) onpage 8‑6 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

The DSC switch is located onthe shift lever. To enable theDSC feature, move the column shiftlever to the M (Manual) position.


1-16 In Brief

The Driver Information Center (DIC)display will show the messageMANUAL SHIFT on the first line andthe current gear will be displayed onthe second line. This is the highestattainable range with all lower gearsaccessible. As an example, when5 (Fifth) gear is selected, 1 (First)through 5 (Fifth) gears are available.

Press the plus/minus buttons,located on the steering column shiftlever, to select the desired range ofgears for current driving conditions.See Manual Mode on page 9‑43.

While using DSC, cruise control andthe tow/haul mode can be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenDSC is active. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9‑43.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)This vehicle's radio is part of thenavigation system. See AM-FMRadio on page 7‑10 later in thismanual.

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM satellite radio hasa wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound.

A fee is required to receive the XMservice.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

Also, see Satellite Radio onpage 7‑16.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle has an auxiliary input,located on the audio faceplate,and a USB port located on theinstrument panel or in the centerconsole. External devices suchas iPod®, laptop computers,MP3 players, CD changers,USB storage device, etc. canbe connected to the auxiliaryport using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) inputjack or the USB port dependingon the audio system.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑31for further information.


In Brief 1-17

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth‐enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.

For more information, see Bluetoothon page 7‑102.

Steering Wheel Controls

If available, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w /cx : Press to changefavorite radio stations, select trackson a CD/DVD, or to navigate tracksor folders on an iPod or USBdevice.

b g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e − e : Press to increase ordecrease volume.

cx : Press to reject anincoming call, or to end a call.

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track or chapterwhile sourced to the CD or DVDslot, or to select tracks and folderson an iPod or USB device.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑3.


1-18 In Brief

Cruise Control

Cruise Control Shown WithHeated Steering Wheel Button

(If Equipped)

The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

I : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator light is on whencruise control is on and turns offwhen cruise control is off.

+ RES : Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previouslyset speed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET − : Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or make thevehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑51.

Navigation SystemThe vehicle's navigation systemprovides detailed maps of mostmajor freeways and roadsthroughout the United Statesand Canada. After a destinationhas been set, the system providesturn-by-turn instructions for reachingthe destination. In addition, thesystem can help locate a varietyof points of interest (POI), suchas banks, airports, restaurants,and more.

See Destination on page 7‑69 in thismanual for more information.


In Brief 1-19

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located at thebottom of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status ofmany vehicle systems and enablesaccess to the personalization menu.

The DIC buttons are located onthe instrument panel, next to thesteering wheel.

3 : Press to display theodometer, trip odometer, fuelrange, average economy, fuelused, timer, transmissiontemperature, instantaneouseconomy, and average vehiclespeed. The compass and outsideair temperature will also be shownin the display. The temperaturewill be shown in °C or °F dependingon the units selected.

T : Press to display the oil life,units, side blind zone system on/off,tire pressure readings for vehicleswith the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), compass zonesetting, and compass recalibration.

U : Press to customize thefeature settings on your vehicle.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information.

V : Press to set or reset certainfunctions and to turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑26.

Vehicle Customization

Some vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the DICbuttons next to the steering wheel.These features include:. Language. Door Lock and Unlock Settings. RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback. Lighting. Chime Volume. Memory Features. Digital Speedometer Display

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.


1-20 In Brief

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If available, this feature will alert youto vehicles located in the vehicle'sside blind zone. When the systemdetects a vehicle in the side blindzone, an amber SBZA display willlight up in the corresponding outsideside mirror.

The system is enabled at everyvehicle startup. It can be disabledthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the message SIDE BLIND ZONESYSTEM UNAVAILABLE appearson the DIC, the system has beendisabled because the sensor isblocked and cannot detect vehiclesin the blind zone. The sensor maybe blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,slush, or even heavy rainstorms.

This message may also activateduring heavy rain or due to roadspray. The vehicle does not needservice.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9‑56 for more information.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the rear vision cameradisplays a view of the area behindthe vehicle on the navigation screenwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse). Once shifted out ofR (Reverse), the navigation screenwill go back to the last screen thathad been displayed, after a delay.

To clean the camera lens, locatedabove the license plate, rinse it withwater and wipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑59.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. URPA comeson automatically when the shift leveris moved into R (Reverse) andoperates at speeds less than 8 km/h(5 mph). URPA uses audio beepsto provide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

The system can be disabled bypressing the rear park aid disablebutton located next to the radio.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑54 for more information.


In Brief 1-21

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has three accessorypower outlets located:. Inside the floor console

storage bin.. On the rear of the floor console.. In the rear cargo area on the

passenger side.

The accessory power outlets arepowered, even when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. Continuing to usepower outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

Universal Remote System

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful tohave another person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑50.

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin andthe StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems turn on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release 5 on the instrument

panel. F illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑37.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and hold5 until F illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑37.

. Press and release 5 again toturn on both systems.


1-22 In Brief

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑47.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and Loading

Information label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑24. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑59.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.


In Brief 1-23

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑66. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑64.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate,use cruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside ServiceU.S. or Canada: 1-800-882-1112

TTY Users (U.S. or Canada):1-888-889-2438

Mexico: 01-800-466-0805

As the owner of a new Cadillac,you are automatically enrolled inthe Roadside Service programwhich is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year to give minorrepair information or make towingarrangements.

For more information see RoadsideService (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside Service(Mexico) on page 13‑10.


1-24 In Brief

Roadside Service and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have a current OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar advisor whowill assess your problem, contactRoadside Service, and relay yourexact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center(U.S. and Canada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.cadillacownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

OnStar® uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, navigation, diagnostics,and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStaradvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle tosee if you need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : This blue button connects youto a specially trained OnStar advisorto verify your account informationand to answer questions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar emergencyadvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for turn‐by‐turnnavigation.


In Brief 1-25

Crisis Assist, Stolen VehicleAssistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,Remote Door Unlock, RoadsideAssistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation and Hands‐FreeCalling are available on mostvehicles. Not all OnStar services areavailable on all vehicles. For moreinformation see the OnStar Owner'sGuide or visit www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080, or pressQ tospeak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement witha wireless service provider forservice in that area. OnStar servicealso cannot work unless the vehicleis in a place where the wirelessservice provider OnStar has hiredfor that area has coverage, networkcapacity and reception when theservice is needed, and technologythat is compatible with the OnStarservice. Not all services areavailable everywhere, particularlyin remote or enclosed areas, or atall times.

The OnStar system can recordand transmit vehicle information.This information is automaticallysent to an OnStar call center whenQ is pressed,] is pressed, or ifthe airbags or ACR system deploy.This information usually includes thevehicle's GPS location and, in theevent of a crash, additional

information regarding the crash thatthe vehicle was involved in (e.g. thedirection from which the vehicle washit). When the virtual advisor featureof OnStar hands-free calling isused, the vehicle also sends OnStarthe vehicle's GPS location so theycan provide services where it islocated.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, includingadequate battery power, for theOnStar equipment to operate.There are other problems OnStarcannot control that may preventOnStar from providing OnStarservice at any particular time orplace. Some examples are damageto important parts of the vehicle ina crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather or wireless phone networkcongestion.


1-26 In Brief

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar hands-free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system maynot be functioning properly.PressQ and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light is appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.PressQ to confirm that theOnStar equipment is active.


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsLiftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-15

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-18Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Interior MirrorsAutomatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignitionand door locks.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

Notice: If the keys get lockedin the vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If you are locked out of yourvehicle, contact Roadside Service.See Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑10 formore information.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance.

The transmitter may betoo far from the vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

With Remote Start andPower Liftgate and Liftglass

(Without Remote Start Similar)

The following functions may beavailable if this vehicle has theRKE system:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the turnsignal lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirpswhen Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40for additional information.

Pressing Q arms the contenttheft‐deterrent system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.



If enabled through the DIC, the turnsignal lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40.If enabled through the DIC, theexterior lamps turn on briefly ifit is dark enough outside. See“Approach Lighting” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft‐deterrentsystem. See Anti-Theft AlarmSystem on page 2‑13.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press/to start the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for additional information.

& (Power Liftgate): Press andhold to open and close the liftgate.The taillamps flash and a chimesounds to indicate when the liftgateis opening and closing.

m (Liftglass): Press and hold toopen the liftglass.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL forthree seconds to activate thepanic alarm. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsrepeatedly for 30 seconds.The alarm turns off when theignition is moved to ON/RUNorL is pressed again. The ignitionmust be in LOCK/OFF for the panicalarm to work.

The vehicle comes withtwo transmitters. Each transmitterwill have a number on top ofit, “1” or “2”. These numberscorrespond to the driver of thevehicle. For example, the memoryseat position for driver 1 will berecalled when using the transmitterlabeled “1”, if enabled through theDIC. See “Memory Features” underPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3for more information.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmittersprogrammed to this vehiclewill work. If a transmitter is lostor stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed throughyour dealer. When the replacementtransmitter is programmed to thisvehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be reprogrammed.Any lost or stolen transmitterswill no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to eighttransmitters programmed to it.See your dealer to have transmittersprogrammed to the vehicle.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.See “REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY” under Key andLock Messages on page 5‑35for additional information.



Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any ofthe circuitry on the transmitter.Static from your body coulddamage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter witha flat, thin object inserted intothe notch, located above themetal base.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis feature allows you to start theengine from outside of the vehicle.It may also start up the vehicle'sheating or air conditioning systemsand rear window defogger. Normaloperation of the system will returnafter the key is turned to theON/RUN position.

During a remote start, the climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperatures.

During a remote start, if the vehiclehas an automatic climate controlsystem and heated seats, theheated seats will turn on duringcolder outside temperatures andwill shut off when the key is turnedto ON/RUN. If the vehicle does nothave an automatic climate control

system, during remote start, you willneed to manually turn the heatedseats on and off. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats on page 3‑8for additional information.

Laws in some communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using theremote start to have the vehicle inview when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirementson remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote startfeature if the vehicle is low on fuel.The vehicle may run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions will have an increasedrange of operation. However,the range may be less while thevehicle is running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2for additional information.



/ (Remote Start): This button willbe on the RKE transmitter if youhave remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.The vehicle's doors will lock.Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flash.If you cannot see the vehicle'slamps, press and hold/ for

two to four seconds. Pressing/again after the vehicle hasstarted will turn the engine off.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the engine isrunning.

If the vehicle is left running itwill automatically shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension has been done.

3. If it is the first remote start sincethe vehicle has been driven,repeat these steps, while theengine is still running, to extendthe engine running time by10 minutes. Remote start canbe extended one time.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

To manually shut off a remote start,do any of the following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and/ until the parkinglamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

The vehicle can be remote startedtwo separate times between drivingsequences. The engine will run for10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine runtime by another 10 minutes withinthe first 10 minute remote start timeframe, and before the engine stops.

For example, if Q and then/ arepressed again after the vehiclehas been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing theengine to run for 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes areconsidered a second remote vehiclestart.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using/, or asingle remote start with one timeextension, the vehicle must bestarted with the key.

After the key is removed from theignition, the vehicle can be remotestarted again.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if the key is in the ignition,the hood is not closed, or if thereis an emission control systemmalfunction and the malfunctionindicator lamp is on.



Also, the engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if the coolanttemperature gets too high or if theoil pressure gets low.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteror the key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks or manual door locks. To lockor unlock the door with the manuallocks, push down or pull up on themanual lock knob.

Power Door LocksWith power door locks, the switcheson the front doors can be used tolock and unlock the vehicle.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.



Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediatelylock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

You can program this feature usingthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Delay Door Lock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This featurecan be programmed using theDriver Information Center (DIC).

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information onDIC programming.

Lockout ProtectionIf the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driverdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the doorto normal operation, turn the slot tothe vertical position.



Doors

Liftgate (Manual)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to drivewith the liftglass or liftgate openbecause carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

If you must drive with the liftglassor liftgate open, or if electricalwiring or other cable connectionsmust pass through the sealbetween the body and theliftglass or liftgate:

. Make sure all other windowsare shut.

. Turn the fan on your heatingor cooling system to itshighest speed with the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

recirculation mode off.That will force outside airinto your vehicle. See DualAutomatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

. If you have air outlets on orunder the instrument panel,open them all the way.

. If your vehicle is equippedwith a power liftgate, disablethe power liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑38.

To unlock the liftgate, use the powerdoor lock switch or press K onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter twice. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

On vehicles with a liftglass, pressthe button on the underside of thelicense pocket applique (A) to openit. The liftglass can also be openedby pressingm on the RKE.

To open the entire liftgate, press& on the RKE or in the vehicle.See “Power Liftgate Operation” inthis section. You can also pressthe touchpad on the underside ofthe liftgate handle (B). The liftgatewill open after a slight delay. Thevehicle must be in P (Park) to openthe liftgate. To close the liftgate, usethe pull cup or pull strap as an aid.



The liftgate or liftglass cannot beopened if the rear wipers are inmotion. Attempting to open theliftgate or liftglass while the rearwipers are in motion will cause therelease of the liftglass or liftgate todelay until the wipers are parked offthe liftglass.

Both the liftglass and liftgate havean electric latch. If the battery isdisconnected or has low voltage,the liftglass and liftgate will notopen. The liftglass and liftgate willresume operation when the batteryis reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connectedand has adequate voltage, andthe liftgate or liftglass still will notfunction, your vehicle should betaken to a dealership for service.

Liftgate (Power)

Power Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑38.

On vehicles with a power liftgate thebutton is on the overhead console.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) touse the power liftgate feature.

& : Press the top of the button toopen or close the power liftgate.

OFF: Press the bottom of thebutton for manual operation of thepower liftgate.



The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound when the power liftgate ismoving.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

The power liftgate can be poweropened and closed in thefollowing ways:

. Press and hold& on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter until the liftgate startsmoving. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operationon page 2‑3.

. Press& on the overheadconsole.

. Press the touchpad on theoutside liftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons, or touchpadswitch a second time while theliftgate is moving reverses thedirection.

l : The liftgate can also beclosed by pressing this button nextto the liftgate latch.

Press the button a second timeduring liftgate operation to reversethat operation.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures, or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power functionis in progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) and the vehicle acceleratesbefore the power liftgate latchesclosed, the liftgate may reverse tothe open position. Cargo could fallout of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closed andlatched before you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the lamps will flash and achime will sound. The liftgate willstay open temporarily, then slowlyclose. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate.



Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or closecycle, a warning chime will soundand the liftgate will automaticallyreverse direction to the full closedor open position. After removingthe obstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same powercycle, the power function willdeactivate, and you must manuallyopen or close the liftgate. TheREAR ACCESS OPEN warningmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) will indicate that theliftgate is open. After removing theobstructions, manually open theliftgate to the full open position orclose the liftgate to the fully closedand latched position. The liftgatewill now resume normal poweroperation.

Pinch sensors are located on thesides of the liftgate. If an object iscaught between the liftgate and the

body and presses against thissensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually. Do notforce the liftgate open or closedduring a power cycle.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press the switch onthe overhead console to the OFFposition.

With the power liftgate disabledand all of the doors unlocked, theliftgate can be manually openedand closed.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate, and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate, usethe pull cup to lower the liftgate andclose. The liftgate latch will powerclose. Always close the liftgatebefore driving.

If the RKE button or the power closebutton on the liftgate is pressedwhile power operation is disabled,the lamps will flash three times, butthe liftgate will not move.

It is not recommended thatyou drive with the liftgate open,however, if you must drive with theliftgate open, the liftgate should beset to manual operation by pressingthe OFF switch on the centerconsole.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected orhas low voltage, the liftgate willnot open. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connectedwith adequate voltage, the switch isnot disabled, and the liftgate still willnot function, your vehicle should betaken to a dealer for service.



Power Assist StepsThe vehicle may have power assiststeps.

The switch used to disable thepower assist steps is located on thecenter console below the climatecontrol system.

The power assist stepsautomatically extend frombeneath the vehicle on the side inwhich the door has been opened.Once the door is closed, the assiststeps automatically move backunder the vehicle after a brief delay.The vehicle must not be moving forthe assist steps to extend or retract.

The assist steps cannot be disabledin the extended position.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemYour vehicle has a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

This is the security light.

To arm the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteror the power door lock switch.The security light will come on toinform the driver the system is

arming. If a door is open whenthe doors are locked, thesecurity light will flash.

If the delayed locking feature isturned on, the theft‐deterrentsystem will not start the armingprocess until the last door isclosed and the delay timer hasexpired. See Delayed Lockingon page 2‑8.

3. Close all doors. The securitylight should go off after about30 seconds. The alarm is notarmed until the security lightgoes off.

If a locked driver door is openedwithout using the RKE transmitter,a 10-second pre-alarm will occur.The horn will chirp and the lightswill flash. If the key is not placedin the ignition and turned toSTART or the door is not unlockedby pressing the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter duringthe 10-second pre-alarm,the alarm will go off.



Your vehicle's headlamps will flashand the horn will sound for about30 seconds, then will turn off to savethe battery power.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe vehicle's key or the manualdoor lock. It activates only if you usethe power door lock switch with thedoor open or the RKE transmitter.You should also remember thatyou can start your vehicle with thecorrect ignition key if the alarm hasbeen set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. If you do not want to activate

the theft-deterrent system, thevehicle should be locked withthe door key after the doors areclosed.

. Always unlock the doors with theRKE transmitter. Unlocking adoor any other way will set offthe alarm if it is armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident,press unlock on the RKE transmitteror place the key in the ignition andturn it to START to turn off thealarm. The alarm will not stop if youtry to unlock a door any other way.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver window and open thedriver door.

2. Activate the system by lockingthe doors with the power doorlock switch while the dooris open, or with the RKEtransmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Then reach in through thewindow, unlock the door withthe manual door lock and openthe door. This should set off thealarm.

While the alarm is set, the powerdoor unlock switch will not work.

If the alarm does not sound whenit should but the headlamps flash,check to see if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑42.

If the alarm does not sound or theheadlamps do not flash, the vehicleshould be serviced by your dealer.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.



Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turnedto ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it prevents the vehiclefrom starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the

vehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when tryingto start the vehicle, there may bea problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off andtry again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑42. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the PASS-Key III+ tohave a new key made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmed

for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys arelost or do not operate, you mustsee your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to havekeys made and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key hasa 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If theengine will not start, see yourdealer for service.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.



4. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it tothe ON/RUN position withinfive seconds of turning theignition to the LOCK/OFFposition in Step 3.

The security light will turnoff once the key has beenprogrammed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If you lose or damage yourPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powerfoldaway mirrors are on the driverdoor armrest.



Mirror Adjustment

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to adjust the mirror.

3. Press the opposite side to getthe control pad to a neutralposition.

Power Foldaway Mirrors

1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors intothe folded position.

Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors

Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors will not stay in the

unfolded position.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfoldaway mirrors. This sound isnormal after a manual foldingoperation.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle has a turn signalindicator on the mirror. An arrow onthe mirror flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Heated MirrorsThe heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger is on and helps to clearfog or frost from the surface of themirrors.

< (Rear Window Defogger):This button is on the climate controlpanel.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.



Automatic DimmingMirrorThe vehicle has an automaticdimming mirror. The driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of headlamps behind you.This feature is controlled by theon and off setting on the insiderearview mirror. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑18 for more information.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the passenger and/ordriver mirror tilts to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This feature lets thedriver view the curb when parallelparking. The mirror(s) return to theoriginal position when the vehicleis shifted out of R (Reverse), orthe ignition is turned off or toOFF/LOCK.

Turn this feature on or off throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑26 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorAutomatic dimming reduces theglare of lights from behind thevehicle. The dimming feature comeson and the indicator light illuminateseach time the vehicle is started.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may have IntelliBeam®.For more information onIntelliBeam, see “IntelliBeamIntelligent High‐Beam HeadlampControl System” under ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.



Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See the OnStar Owner's Guide formore information about the servicesOnStar provides.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The power window switches are onthe driver door.

In addition, each door has a switchfor its own window. The front powerwindow switch operates with twopositions for both up and downmovement and the rear powerwindow switch operates with oneposition for up and two positionsfor down movement. Press theswitch to the first position to lowerthe window to the desired level.Pull the switch up to raise thewindow.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) that allowsyou to use the power windows oncethe ignition has been turned off.For more information, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑35.

Express-Down/Up Windows

Windows with the express featureallow the windows to be raised andlowered all the way without holdingthe switch.

Press or pull the switch fully andrelease it to activate the expressfeature.

The express mode can be canceledat any time by briefly pressing orpulling the switch.



Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when the express‐up isactive, the window will stop at theobstruction and auto‐reverse to apreset factory position. Weatherconditions such as severe icingmay also cause the window toauto‐reverse. The window willreturn to normal operation once theobstruction or condition is removed.

Express Window Anti‐PinchOverride

{ WARNING

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

In an emergency, the anti‐pinchfeature can be overridden in asupervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to the secondposition. The window will rise foras long as the switch is held. Oncethe switch is released, the expressmode is re‐activated.

In this mode, the window can stillclose on an object in its path. Usecare when using the override mode.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected,or is not working, you will need toreprogram each front power windowfor the express-up feature to work.Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle's battery.

To program each front window,follow these steps:

1. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active, closeall doors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.



Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): This buttonis on the driver door near thewindow switches.

Press the right side of thebutton to disable the rear windowcontrols. The light on the button willilluminate, indicating the feature is inuse. The rear windows still can beraised or lowered using the driverwindow switches when the lockoutfeature is active.

To restore power to the rearwindows, press the button again.The light on the button will go out.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod ifavailable.

Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, thereare two sunroof switches on theoverhead console above therearview mirror.



The sunroof only operateswhen the ignition is in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑35.

To open or close the sunroof, pressthe open or close sunroof switch (A)to the first detent position.

To express open or close thesunroof, press the open or closesunroof switch (A) to the seconddetent position and release. To stopthe movement, press the switchagain.

The sunroof has a comfort stopfeature which stops the sunroof fromopening to the full-open position.From the comfort stop position,

press the open or close sunroofswitch (A) a second time to openthe sunroof to the full-open position.

To automatically vent or close thesunroof, press the vent open orclose sunroof switch (B).

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

Dirt and debris may collect onthe sunroof seal or in the track.This could cause an issuewith sunroof operation, noise,or plugging the water drainagesystem. Periodically open thesunroof and remove any obstaclesor loose debris. Wipe the sunroofseal and roof sealing area using aclean cloth, mild soap, and water.Do not remove grease from thesunroof.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear SeatsHeated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Second Row Seats (60/40Split Bench Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Second Row Seats (BucketSeats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-38Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-38Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-42When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-53

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-54Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-60Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-62Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-71

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-72

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the topof the seatback, and push therestraint down.



Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.

The vehicle's 2nd-row seats havehead restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The vehicle's 3rd-row seat,if equipped, has headrests thatcan be adjusted up and down.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the entire control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑6.



Memory Features

The controls on the driver door areused to program and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power steering column, andthe adjustable throttle and brakepedals.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, includingthe seatback recliner andlumbar, both outside mirrors,power steering column, andthe throttle and brake pedals.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16and Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal on page 9‑31 formore information.

Not all mirrors and adjustablethrottles and brake pedals willhave the ability to save andrecall their positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1” or“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).A single beep will sound. The seat,outside mirrors, power steeringcolumn, and adjustable throttleand brake pedals will move to thepositions previously stored for theidentified driver.



Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat, outside mirrors, powersteering column, and pedals tostored positions when entering thevehicle.

To activate, unlock the driverdoor with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. The driverseat, outside mirrors, power steeringcolumn, and adjustable pedals willmove to the memory positionsassociated with the transmitterused to unlock the vehicle.

This feature can be turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Memory Seat Recall”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the power seat controls, memoryor power mirror buttons, powersteering column control, or theadjustable pedal switch.

If something has blocked the driverseat, power steering column, or theadjustable pedals while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction; thenpress and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memory itemthat is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory positionagain by pressing the appropriatememory button. If the memoryposition is still not recalling, seeyour dealer for service.

Easy Exit Positions

This feature can move the driverseat rearward and the powersteering column up and forward toallow extra room to exit the vehicle.

B (Easy Exit Positions): Pressto recall the easy exit positions.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

If the easy exit feature isprogrammed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, automaticdriver seat and power steeringcolumn movement occur whenthe ignition key is removed.



A single beep sounds. The driverseat moves back approximately8 cm (3 in) and the power steeringcolumn moves up and forward.To move the seat back farther,press the easy exit button againuntil the seat is all the way back.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and holdthe power seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

See “Easy Exit Recall” and“Easy Exit Setup” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40 formore information.

Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar

To adjust the lumbar support:. To increase or decrease lumbar

support, press and hold the frontor rear of the control.

. To raise or lower the height ofthe lumbar support, press andhold the top or bottom of thecontrol.

Reclining Seatbacks

Power Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust theseat while the vehicle is moving.The sudden movement couldstartle and confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver seatonly when the vehicle is notmoving.



To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline the seatback.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise the seatback.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin,the seat heater may causeburns even at low temperatures.To reduce the risk of burns,people with such a conditionshould use care when usingthe seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do notplace anything on the seat thatinsulates against heat, such asa blanket, cushion, cover orsimilar item. This may causethe seat heater to overheat.An overheated seat heater maycause a burn or may damagethe seat.

The buttons are on the climatecontrol panel.

{ (Cooled Seat): Press to coolthe seat.

+ (Heated Seatback): Press toheat the seatback.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat seat and seatback.

One of these symbols appears onthe climate control display when thisfeature is on.

Press the desired button once forthe highest setting. With each pressof the button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting.

Indicator bars next to the symbol onthe climate control display show theselected setting: three for high, twofor medium, and one for low.

The heated and cooled seatsare canceled when the ignition isturned off. To use this feature afterrestarting the vehicle, press thedesired button again.



Rear Seats

Heated Rear Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures.See the Warning under Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats onpage 3‑8.

The buttons are on the Rear SeatAudio (RSA) panel.

Press L or M heat the left outboardor right outboard seat cushion.An indicator on the RSA displayappears when this feature is on.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat changesto the next lower setting, and thenthe off setting. Indicator bars next tothe symbol show the setting: threefor high, two for medium, and onefor low.

The heated seats are canceledten seconds after the ignition isturned off. To use this feature afterthe vehicle is restarted, press thedesired button.



Second Row Seats(60/40 Split Bench Seat)If the vehicle has a 60/40 splitbench, the seat can be folded foradditional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exitto the third row seat, if equipped.The seat has either the manual foldand tumble feature or the automaticseat release fold and tumblefeature.

Manual Fold and TumbleFeature

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or on the seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

2. Lift the lever, on the outboardside of the seat, to release theseatback.

The seatback will fold forward tocreate a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seat forwardand/or put the front seatback inthe upright position.



3. Lift the same lever again torelease the rear of the seat fromthe floor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Third Row Seat

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat, if equipped:



2. Lift the lever, on the bottomrear of the second row seat onthe inboard side, to release theseatback. The seatback will foldforward.




Automatic Seat Release Foldand Tumble Feature

The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

{ WARNING

Automatically folding andtumbling the seat when someoneis sitting in the seat, could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release button.

Folding and Tumbling the SecondRow Seat from the Third Row Seator Outside

{ WARNING





Driver Side Rear Panel ButtonShown

2. Press the automatic seat releasebutton on the panel behind therear doors.

The seatback automaticallyfolds flat and the seat tumblesforward. There will be a slightdelay between the folding of theseatback and the tumbling ofthe seat.



Returning the Seat to theSitting Position

To return the seat to the sittingposition:

1. Pull the seat down until it latchesto the floor. The seatback cannotbe raised if the seat is notlatched to the floor.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

3. Make sure that the safety belt inthe center seating position is notcaught between the two seatsand is not twisted.

Second Row Seats(Bucket Seats)If the vehicle has bucket seats, theseatbacks can be reclined, and theseats can be folded for additionalcargo space or folded and tumbledfor easy entry and exit to the thirdrow seat, if equipped. The seat haseither the manual fold and tumblefeature or the automatic seatrelease fold and tumble feature.



Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

{ WARNING



Manual Fold and TumbleFeature

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:





2. Lift the lever, on the outboardside of the seat, to release theseatback.

The seatback will fold forward tocreate a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seat forwardand/or put the front seatback inthe upright position.

3. Lift the lever again to release therear of the seat from the floor.The seat will tumble forward.



Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Third Row Seat

{ WARNING





2. Lift the lever, on the bottom rearof the second row seat on theinboard side, to release theseatback. The seatback willfold forward.


Automatic Seat Release Foldand Tumble Feature

The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

{ WARNING

Automatically folding andtumbling the seat when someoneis sitting in the seat, could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release button.



Folding and Tumbling the SecondRow Seat from the Third Row Seator Outside

{ WARNING





Driver Side Rear Panel ButtonShown

2. Press the automatic seat releasebutton on the panel behind therear doors.

The seatback automaticallyfolds flat and the seat tumblesforward. There will be a slightdelay between the folding of theseatback and the tumbling ofthe seat.

Returning the Seat to theSitting Position

To return the seat to the sittingposition:

1. Pull the seat down until it latchesto the floor. The seatback cannotbe raised if the seat is notlatched to the floor.

{ WARNING


2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.



Third Row SeatsIf the vehicle has a third row seat,the seatback can be folded, andthe entire seat can be tumbled orremoved from the vehicle.

Folding the Seatback

To fold the seatback:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Remove all items on the seatcushion.


3. Lift the release lever “1,” on thebottom rear of the seatback onthe outboard side of the seat,and the seatback folds forward.

Returning the Seatback to theUpright Position

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:


2. Raise the seatback to theupright position.

{ WARNING





Tumbling the Third Row Seat

To tumble the seat:


2. Make sure the headrests arecompletely lowered and there isnothing under, in front of, or onthe seat.

3. Fold the seatbacks forwardusing lever “1” and theinstructions listed previouslyunder “Folding the Seatback.”The seat cannot be unlatchedfrom the floor unless theseatback is folded.

4. Unlatch the seat from the floorby lifting lever “2” next to thecarrying handle on the rear ofthe seat, near the bottom.

5. Lift the rear of the seat up fromthe floor.

6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lockit into place.

7. Push and pull on the seat tomake sure it is locked.

Put the seat in this position onlywhen necessary for additional cargospace.

Returning the Third Row Seatfrom a Tumbled Position

To return the seat to the normalseating position:


2. Make sure there is nothing thatcould become trapped underthe seat.

3. Release the seat from thetumbled position by lifting lever“2” next to the carrying handle atthe bottom rear of the seat.

4. Pull the seat down until it latchesto the floor. The seatback cannotbe raised to the upright positionunless the seat is latched to thefloor.




{ WARNING



Removing the Third Row Seat

To remove the seat:


2. Fold the seatbacks forwardusing lever “1” and theinstructions listed previouslyunder “Folding the Seatback.”The seat cannot be unlatchedfrom the floor unless theseatback is folded.

3. Unlatch the seat from the floorby pulling the handle at the rearof the seat “3 Removal Only”toward the rear of the vehicle.

4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle.There is a track in the floor toguide the seat wheels out of thevehicle.



Installing the Third Row Seat

To install the seat:

1. Open the liftgate to access therear of the vehicle.

2. Slide the front outboard seatwheels into the track on thefloor and roll the seat forward.The front latches should lockinto place. If the latches do notlock, try tilting the rear of theseat upward slightly.

3. Lower the rear of the seat andpush down on the seat toengage the rear floor latches.

{ WARNING

A seat that is not locked intoplace properly can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock theseat into place properly wheninstalling it.

4. Push and pull on the seat tomake sure it is locked into place.The seatback cannot be raisedto the upright position unlessthe seat is latched to the floor.


{ WARNING



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

7. Make sure the safety belts arereturned to the original positionover the seatbacks.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder orbe ejected from the vehicle.You and your passenger(s) canbe seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, you mightnot be, if you are buckled up.Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle thatis not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑15 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be ina crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!



Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.



The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.



Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether youare wearing a safety belt ornot. But your chance of beingconscious during and after anaccident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater ifyou are belted. And you canunbuckle a safety belt, even ifyou are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is truenot only in frontal collisions,but especially in side andother collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, suchas bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑55 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑57. Follow thoserules for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.



First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should be

worn low and snug on the hips,just touching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose.It will not give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.The lap belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.




A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injuredif your belt is buckled in thewrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces wouldbe there, not on the pelvic bones.This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you canslide under the belt. The beltforce would then be applied onthe abdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also,the belt would apply too muchforce to the ribs, which are notas strong as shoulder bones.You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver orspleen. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.




A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could movetoo far forward increasing thechance of head and neck injury.You might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe center front passenger position,if equipped, which has a lap belt.See Lap Belt on page 3‑37 for moreinformation.

The lap‐shoulder belts for the firstand second row seating positionsare equipped with free‐falling latchplates. If the vehicle has a third row,the lap‐shoulder belts have eitherfree‐falling or cinching latch plates.

Use the following pictures todetermine the latch plate style:

Free-Falling Latch Plate

Cinching Latch Plate

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.



2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt with a free‐fallinglatch plate is pulled out all theway, the child restraint lockingfeature may be engaged. If thishappens, let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system,if equipped. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑48for more information.

If the belt stops before it reachesthe buckle, for lap‐shoulder beltswith cinching latch plates, tiltthe latch plate and keep pullingthe safety belt until it can bebuckled.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If you findthat the latch plate will not gofully into the buckle, see if youare using the correct buckle.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑38.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. If equipped with a shoulderbelt height adjuster, move it tothe height that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjuster” in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be surethe safety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thebelt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder and not falling off of it.The belt should be close to, butnot contacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑25.

Squeeze the buttons (A) on thesides of the height adjuster andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

The adjuster can be moved up justby pushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move itdown without squeezing the buttonsto make sure it has locked intoposition.



Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safetybelt pretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tighten thesafety belts during the early stagesof a moderate to severe frontal,near frontal, or rear crash if thethreshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash on page 3‑39.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, theyare available through your dealer.The guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seatsand for some adults. When installedand properly adjusted, the comfortguide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide, if equipped, foreach outside passenger position inthe second row seat and the thirdrow, if the vehicle has one.

Second Row

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. For the second row, remove theguide from its storage clip on theinterior body.



Third Row

If your vehicle has a third row,remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt isnot twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be underthe belt and the guide on top.



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into its storage clip on theinterior body or storage pocket onthe side of the seat.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.



A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Lap BeltThis part is only for the lap belt.To learn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑31.

The vehicle may have a centerseating position. When you sit inthe center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, whichhas no retractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 3‑38.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.



If you find that the latch plate willnot go fully into the buckle, see ifyou are using the correct buckle.Be sure that the latch plate clickswhen inserted into the buckle.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information,see the instruction sheet that comeswith the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors,and anchorages are workingproperly. Look for any other looseor damaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑15 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑38.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand passenger directly behindthe driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and the personseated directly behind thatpassenger.



The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. If the vehicle has a third row

seat, it will have a third rowroof-rail airbag.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat‐mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— evenif you have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safety

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

belts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑44.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children,but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them.Young children and infantsneed the protection that a childrestraint system can provide.Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 3‑55 orInfants and Young Children onpage 3‑57.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16for more information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat‐mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.




The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.


If the vehicle has a third rowpassenger seat, the roof-rail airbagsare located in the ceiling abovethe rear windows for the outboardpassenger positions in the third row.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

that person causing severeinjury or even death. The pathof an inflating airbag must bekept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the pathof an inflating roof-rail airbagwill be blocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's orright front passenger's head andchest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflateat different crash speeds.For example:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an objectthat deforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectdoes not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact.For moderate frontal impacts,dual-stage airbags inflate at alevel less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts,full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has a seat positionsensor. Vehicles with dual stageairbags also have seat positionsensors which enable the sensingsystem to monitor the position ofthe driver seat and the right frontpassenger seat.



The seat position sensor providesinformation that is used to determineif the airbags should deploy at areduced level or at full deployment.

The vehicle has seat‐mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑39.Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat‐mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are notintended to inflate in rear impacts.A seat‐mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side of

the vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will deploy wheneither side of the vehicle is struckor if the sensing system predictsthat the vehicle is about to roll over,or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined bythe direction of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat‐mounted side impact airbags,there are airbags modules in theside of the front seatbacks closestto the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.



How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly overthe occupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants inthe outboard seating positions inthe first, second, and third rows,if equipped with a third row seat.The rollover capable roof-railairbags are designed to help reducethe risk of full or partial ejection inrollover events, although no systemcan prevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motionis not toward those airbags. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑44 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑45.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.



{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soonas it is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle may have a featurethat may automatically unlock thedoors, turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turn

off the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functionsin the vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crashsensing and diagnostic modulewhich records information aftera crash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑17 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑18.



. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemIf the vehicle has the passengerairbag status indicator pictured inthe following illustration, then thevehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passengerposition. The passenger airbagstatus indicator, if equipped, isvisible on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.If you are using remote start,if equipped, to start the vehiclefrom a distance, you may not seethe system check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the wordON or OFF, or the symbol for on oroff, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑16.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbags(if equipped) and the roof-railairbags are not affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presenceof a properly-seated occupantand determine if the right frontpassenger frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.



We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines an infant

is present in a child restraint.. A right front passenger takes

his/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. There is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit asa reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate)the right front passenger frontalairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size issitting properly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag tobe enabled, the on indicator willlight and stay lit as a reminderthat the airbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, depending uponthe person's seating postureand body build. Everyone in the

vehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) onpage 3‑72 or Securing ChildRestraints (Center Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑75 orSecuring Child Restraints(Right Front Seat Position) onpage 3‑75.



5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator isstill lit, turn the vehicle off.Then slightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,

use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing system maintainthe passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the beltis pulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag off forsome adult‐size occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back all theway and start again.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers, can affect how well

the passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑53 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit ifan object, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is puton an unoccupied seat. If this isnot desired, remove the objectfrom the seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There areparts of the airbag system inseveral places around the vehicle.Your dealer and the service manualhave information about servicingthe vehicle and the airbag system.To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑15.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, theymay keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Changingor moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrument

panel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle may havea passenger sensing systemfor the right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery ortrim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such asan aftermarket seat heater ora comfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.

This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s).See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑48.

If you have any questions,call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers andaddresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Twoof the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual.See Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑1 or CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (Mexico)on page 13‑3.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑68 for additionalimportant information.



Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions,call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers andaddresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Twoof the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual.See Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑1 or CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (Mexico)on page 13‑3.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑45. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.



If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16 for more information.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑31 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.



. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length ofthe trip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑31.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

impact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder beltis wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continuesto tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is also

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

better to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back asit will go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available.When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designedto be used in a motor vehicle.If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federalmotor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight and

height limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash,infants need complete support.This is because an infant's neckis not fully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help achild to see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by

the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑63 formore information. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints.In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passenger

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

frontal airbag, no systemis fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑48 for additionalinformation.



{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraintin a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you placethe child restraint and the size ofthe child restraint, you may notbe able to access adjacent safetybelt assemblies or LATCH anchorsfor additional passengers orchild restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access toor interferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.



When installing a child restraintwith a top tether, you must alsouse either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide youwith instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle.There are two lower anchors foreach LATCH seating position thatwill accommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving orin a crash.



Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — 60/40

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

Second Row — Bucket

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.



Third Row Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.There is one top tether anchor thatcan be used for either the third rowcenter or driver side seating positionbut not both at the same time.

For models with a third row seat,see the information following forinstalling a child restraint with a toptether in the third row, if your vehiclehas one. Never install two toptethers using the same top tetheranchor.

For models with 60/40 secondrow seating, the rear right sidepassenger and center seatingpositions have exposed metalanchors located in the creasebetween the seatback and theseat cushion.

For models with second row bucketseats, both rear seating positionshave exposed metal anchorslocated in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with bucket secondrow seating, the top tether anchorsare located at the bottom rear ofthe seat cushion for each seatingposition in the second row. Be sureto use an anchor located on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.



Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the top tether anchors arelocated at the bottom rear of theseat cushion for each seatingposition in the second row. Be sureto use an anchor located on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Third Row Seat

For vehicles with a third row seat,there is one top tether anchorlocated at the bottom rear of theseat cushion that can be used foreither the third row center or driverside seating position. Never installtwo top tethers using the same toptether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑62 foradditional information.



Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than onechild restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraintso children cannot reach them.Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.



Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten thelower attachments to thelower anchors. If the childrestraint does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether and

the safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if the vehicle has one.

Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.



. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrestor head restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

. If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether around theinboard or outboard sideof the headrest or headrestraint.



. If the position you are usinghas a fixed or an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sureit is securely held in place.To check, grasp the childrestraint at the LATCH path andattempt to move it side‐to‐sideand back‐and‐forth. Thereshould be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement,for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or even

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

death in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.



Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑63 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraintis secured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑63 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to securethe child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑62.

The vehicle's lap‐shoulder beltsfor the first and second rowseating positions are equippedwith free‐falling latch plates.If the vehicle has a third row, thelap‐shoulder belts have eitherfree‐falling or cinching latch plates.



Use the following pictures todetermine the latch plate style:

Free‐Falling Latch Plate

Cinching Latch Plate

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

For third row seating positions,with cinching latch plates, tilt thelatch plate to adjust the belt ifneeded.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


4. For passenger seating positionswith a lap‐shoulder belt and afree‐falling latch plate, pull therest of the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When installing a childrestraint using a lap‐shoulderbelt and a cinching latch plate,skip Step 4 and proceed toStep 5.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out ofthe retractor to make surethe retractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑63 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition)

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraintin a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑62.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑48 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑16 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passengersensing system, if equipped,has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though itis turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑48 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑63 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraintis secured using a safety belt andit uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑63 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the vehicle is equipped withthe passenger sensing system,and when the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right front

passenger frontal airbag, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light andstay lit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑48 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxPull the bottom of the glove boxhandle upward to open it. Usethe key to lock and unlock theglove box.

CupholdersCupholders are located in the centerconsole for the front passengers.Press down on the access doorrelease to open and use the frontcupholders. Push the door backdown to close it. Push down andthen back on the front cupholderto remove it for cleaning.

Heated and CooledCupholders

For vehicles with heated and cooledcupholders, these are located in thefront center console.

Press down on the access doorrelease button to open thecupholder door.

To set to cool mode, press andrelease the button the i showsblue. Press and release again toturn it off.


4-2 Storage

To set to heat mode, press andrelease the button the h shows red.Press and release again to turnit off.

Insulated containers will not workproperly. Use only non-insulatedcontainers.

Notice: When the cuphholder isturned on, the inside receptaclesare hot or cold. Temperaturevariations in the cupholders maycause condensation. To avoiddamage, do not store electronicdevices or other items here.

Rear Passenger Cupholders

Pull down on the lid to access thecupholders in the rear floor console.

Vehicles with the rear seat armrestmay also contain cupholders.Pull down the armrest to use thecupholders.

Armrest StorageFor vehicle with an armrest/storagecompartment located by the secondrow seat, pull the loop at the top ofthe armrest out to lower the armrest.

Push the button on the front of thearmrest and pull the top up to openthe compartment.

Rear StorageFor vehicles with a rear storagearea, it is located in the rearcargo area of the vehicle on thedriver side.

Turn the knobs and pull the storagedoor to access. The door can beremoved.


Storage 4-3

Center Console StorageA console compartment is locatedbetween the bucket seats.

The console has both an upper andlower storage bin accessed by liftingup on the latches located at thefront of the console lid.

The console may have anaccessory power outlet inside.See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

The rear of the console also has acupholder that swings down for therear seat passengers to use.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMCertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GMCertifiedcrossrails can be purchased asan accessory. See your dealerfor additional information.

For vehicles with crossrails, theycan be moved back and forth tohelp secure cargo. To adjust them,turn the knob located at each endof the crossrail counterclockwiseuntil the crossrail can move freely.To secure the crossrail, turn theknob located at each end of thecrossrail clockwise until tightened.Tie the load to the siderails orsiderail supports.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss ofcargo when driving, check tomake sure crossrails and cargoare securely fastened. Loadingcargo on the roof rack will make thevehicle’s center of gravity higher.


4-4 Storage

Avoid high speeds, sudden starts,sharp turns, sudden braking orabrupt maneuvers, otherwise it mayresult in loss of control. If driving fora long distance, on rough roads,or at high speeds, occasionally stopthe vehicle to make sure the cargoremains in its place.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑24.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo,check now and then to make surethe luggage and cargo are stillsecurely fastened.

Be sure the cargo is properlyloaded.. If small heavy objects are placed

on the roof, place the load inthe area over the rear wheels(behind the rear side door onextended models). If needed,cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywoodto fit inside the crossrails andsiderails to spread the load.If plywood is used, tie it to thesiderail supports.

. Tie the load to the crossrailsor the siderail supports. Usethe crossrails only to keep theload from sliding. To move thecrossrails, pull out on the latchrelease handle at each end.Slide the crossrail to the desiredposition balancing the force sideto side. Push the release handleback into the latched positionand slide the crossrail back andforth slightly to be sure the latchsnaps securely into place.

. If needed to carry long items,move the crossrails as far apartas they will go. Tie the load tothe crossrails and the siderailsor siderail supports. Also tiethe load to the bumpers. Do nottie the load so tightly that thecrossrails or siderails aredamaged.

. After moving a crossrail, be sureit is securely locked into thesiderail.

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the glassor above the rear load doors.

If items are loaded on the roof of thevehicle, care should be taken not toblock or damage the CHMSL unit.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-18MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-23StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-23Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-24Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-31Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-34Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-34Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-35Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-35Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-38

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-40Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-40

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-40

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-50Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The power tilt wheel control islocated on the left side of thesteering column.

Push the control up or down to tiltthe steering wheel up or down.

To set the memory position, see“Memory Features” in Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.



Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w /cx (Next/Previous):Press to select preset or favoriteradio stations, select tracks on aCD/DVD, or navigate an iPod orUSB device.

Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orcx togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

CD/DVD

To select tracks on a CD/DVD:

Press and releasew orcx togo to the next or previous track.

Selecting Tracks on an iPod orUSB Device (Vehicles without aNavigation System)

1. Press and holdw orcxwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew orcxto scroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw, or press ¨ toplay the highlighted track.

Navigating Folders on an iPod orUSB Device (Vehicles without aNavigation System):

1. Press and holdw orcxwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdcx to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orcxto scroll up or down the list.. To select a folder, press

and holdw, or press ¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further inthe folder list, press andholdcx.



Navigating an iPod or USB Deviceon the Main Audio Screen(Vehicles with a NavigationSystem)

1. Press and releasew orcxto select the next or previoustrack within the selectedcategory.

2. Press and holdw orcx tomove quickly through the tracks.

3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

Navigating an iPod or USB Deviceon the Music Navigator Screen(Vehicles with a NavigationSystem)

1. Press and releasew orcxto select the next or previoustrack within the selectedcategory.

2. Press and holdw orcx tomove quickly through the trackswithin the selected category.

3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar systems, press and holdfor longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems.See Bluetooth on page 7‑102and the OnStar Owner's Guidefor more information.

cx (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio and CD, andfor equipped vehicles, the DVD,front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one secondto initiate voice recognition.See “Voice Recognition” in theNavigation System manual formore information.



¨ (Seek): Press to go to thenext radio station while in AM,FM, or XM™.

For vehicles with or without anavigation system:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and hold ¨ until a beepis heard, to place the radio intoSCAN mode. A station will playfor five seconds before movingto the next station.

2. To stop the SCAN function,press ¨ again.

While listening to a CD/DVD, pressand hold ¨ to quickly move forwardthrough the tracks. Release to stopon the desired track.

+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the volume.

Heated Steering WheelFor vehicles with a heated steeringwheel, the button for this feature islocated on the steering wheel.

( : Press to turn the heatedsteering wheel on or off. A light onthe button displays when the featureis turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

HornTo sound the horn, press the centerpad on the steering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to8,then release. Several wipes, holdthe band on8 longer.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

6 (Low Speed): Slowwipes.



? (High Speed): Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑35.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Windshield Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle at the top of the multifunctionlever, to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers clear thewindow and then either stop orreturn to the preset speed.

Rear WindowWiper/Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

The rear wiper control is located onthe turn and lane‐change lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

9 (Off): Turns the wiper off.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Turns onthe rear wiper delay.

Z (Rear Wiper): Turns on the rearwiper.

= (Rear Wiper Wash): Press thisbutton on the end of the lever tospray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The wipers will clear the

rear window and either stop orreturn to your preset speed.For more washer cycles, pressand hold the button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate or liftglassis open or ajar. If the liftgate orliftglass is opened while the rearwiper is on, the wiper returns tothe parked position and stops.

CompassYour vehicle may have a compassin the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealerwill set the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate for



compass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicleis in P (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel buttonuntil the vehicle heading,for example, N for North,is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass.See “Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.



If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may bea strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CBor cell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehiclein tight circles at less than8 km/h (5 mph) to completethe calibration. The DICwill display CALIBRATIONCOMPLETE for a few secondswhen the calibration is complete.The DIC display will then returnto the previous menu.

ClockThe analog clock is not connectedwith any other vehicle system andruns by itself.

To adjust the clock, do the following:

1. Locate the adjustment button,near the lower left corner of theclock.

2. Push and hold the adjustmentbutton to advance the clockhands. Holding the button downwill cause the clock to advancefaster. Release the button beforeyou get to the desired time.

3. Push and release the button toincrease the time by one minuteincrements until the desired timeis reached.



Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has three accessorypower outlets located:. Inside the floor console

storage bin.. On the rear of the floor console.. In the rear cargo area on the

passenger side.

Remove the cover to use andreplace when not in use.

The accessory power outlets arepowered, even when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. Continuing to usepower outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain power accessory plugsmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload adapter or vehicle fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. Do notuse equipment exceeding themaximum amperage rating of20 amperes. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑82.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the poweroutlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only,such as cell phone charge cords.



Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternative Current

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plugit back in or turn the RemoteAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑35

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high

initial peak wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiringan extremely stablepower supply such as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touchsensor lamps, etc.

Cigarette LighterThe cigarette lighter is located in thecenter console near the cupholders.Press on the access door to open itand use the lighter.

To use the cigarette lighter, push itin all the way, and let go. When it isready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysThe front ashtray is located in thecenter console near the cupholders.Press on the access door to open itand use the ashtray.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it fromthe center console. Slide it back inand push down to be sure it issecure.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar




SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in both kilometersper hour (km/h) and miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe vehicle's odometer workstogether with the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The Trip odometer canbe set. See “Trip Odometer” underDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑26 for more information.

To check the odometer mileagewhile the vehicle is not running,press the trip stem on theinstrument panel cluster.

If the vehicle ever needs a newodometer installed, the new one willbe set to the correct mileage total ofthe old odometer.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last setto zero.

For more information see “TripOdometer” under Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑26.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, butthe vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.



Here are some situations ownersmay experience with the fuel gauge.None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gauge.. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator on the gauge movestowards the shaded area on thethermostat, it means that the enginecoolant has overheated. If thevehicle has been operating undernormal driving conditions, pull offthe road, stop the vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22.



Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

When the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds toremind a driver to fasten the safetybelt, unless the driver safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light flashes forseveral seconds, then comes onsolid for several more.

This chime and light sequenceare repeated if the driver remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is inmotion. If the driver safety belt isalready buckled, neither the chimenor the light comes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminder light,several seconds after the engineis started, a chime sounds forseveral seconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safetybelt. The passenger safety belt light,located on the overhead console,comes on and stays on for severalseconds, flashes for several moreseconds and then comes on solidfor several more.

This chime and light sequence isrepeated if the passenger remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is inmotion.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.



Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stayson it indicates there is an electricalproblem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑39.

The airbag readiness light comes onsolid for a few seconds when theengine is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message can also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5‑38 for more information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorIf the vehicle has the airbag statusindicator pictured in the followingillustration, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position.The passenger airbag statusindicator is on the overheadconsole. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑48 for importantsafety information.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS.”



United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, for severalseconds as a system check. If youare using remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.

Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the statusof the right front passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may bea problem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system.See your dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly whenthe ignition key is turned to START,but the engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out oncethe engine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, there

could be a problem with thecharging system. A chargingsystem message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) can alsoappear. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑31for more information. This light couldindicate that there are problems witha generator drive belt, or that thereis an electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.


MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operationof the fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.



If the Malfunction Indicator Lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with thislight on, after a while, theemission controls might notwork as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications madeto the engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause thislight to come on. Modificationsto these systems could leadto costly repairs not coveredby the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.



An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected:. Make sure the fuel cap is

fully installed. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑68.The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missingfuel cap allows fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. A fewdriving trips with the capproperly installed shouldturn the light off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The conditionis usually corrected when theelectrical system dries out.A few driving trips should turnthe light off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑64.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial andlocal governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment.For the inspection, the emissionsystem test equipment is connectedto the vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.



The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed bythe system. This can happenif the battery has recentlybeen replaced or if the batteryhas run down. The diagnosticsystem evaluates criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightWith the ignition on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. If thevehicle is driven with the parkingbrake engaged, a chime soundswhen the vehicle speed is greaterthan 5 km/h (3 mph).

The vehicle brake systemconsists of two hydraulic circuits.If one circuit is not working, theremaining circuit can still work tostop the vehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on anda chime sounds there could be abrake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected by your dealer.

This light can also come on due tolow brake fluid. See Brake Fluid onpage 10‑28 for more information.

Metric English

This light comes on briefly when theignition is turned to ON/RUN. If itdoes not, have it fixed so it will beready to warn if there is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal could be harder to pushor could go closer to the floor.



It can take longer to stop. If the lightis still on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑94.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignition

off. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑21.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑31 forall brake related DIC messages.




Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑43.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

The StabiliTrak indicator light comeson briefly when the engine isstarted.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stayson while driving, there might be aproblem with the StabiliTrak systemand the vehicle may need service.When this warning light is on, thesystem is off and does not limitwheel spin.

The light flashes if the system isactive and is working to assist thedriver with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑47 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a Tire PressureMonitor System, this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.It provides information about tirepressures and the Tire PressureMonitor System.



When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑39 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires tothe pressure value shown on theTire and Loading Information Label.See Tire Pressure on page 10‑57for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may bea problem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑60 formore information.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.




Security Light

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.

High-Beam on Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑6 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑9 for moreinformation.

Lamps on Reminder

This light comes on whenever theparking lamps are on.

See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑51 for moreinformation.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

The DIC displays informationabout your vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. The DICalso allows some features tobe customized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40for more information.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located in the center of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel, next to thesteering wheel.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. A digitalspeedometer also appears atthe bottom of the DIC display.The digital speedometer can beenabled or disabled. See “DISPLAYDIGITAL SPEED” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40 formore information.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press todisplay the odometer, tripodometer, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, timer,transmission temperature,instantaneous economy,and average vehicle speed.



The compass and outside airtemperature will also be shown inthe display. The temperature will beshown in °C or °F depending on theunits selected.

T (Vehicle Information):Press to display the oil life, units,side blind zone system on/off,tire pressure readings for vehicleswith the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), compass zonesetting, and compass recalibration.

U (Customization): Press tocustomize the feature settingson your vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press to set orreset certain functions and to turnoff or acknowledge messages onthe DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to scrollthrough the following menu items:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi).

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “Units”later in this section.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button until TRIPdisplays. This display shows thecurrent distance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi)) sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the set/resetbutton while the trip odometer isdisplayed.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL RANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate numberof remaining kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The display willshow LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.Fuel range cannot be reset.



Average Economy

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVERAGE ECONOMY displays.This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.To reset AVERAGE ECONOMY,press and hold the set/reset button.

Fuel Used

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL USED displays. This displayshows the number of liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, pressand hold the set/reset button whileFUEL USED is displayed.

Timer

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This displaycan be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press theset/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will showthe amount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset,not including time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shownon the DIC. The timer will recordup to 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, pressand hold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

Transmission Temperature

Press the trip/fuel buttonuntil TRANS TEMP displays.This display shows the temperatureof the automatic transmission fluidin either degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Instantaneous Economy

If your vehicle has this display,press the trip/fuel button untilINST ECON displays. This displayshows the current fuel economy ata particular moment and will changefrequently as driving conditionschange. This display shows theinstantaneous fuel economy in litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). Unlikeaverage economy, this screencannot be reset.

The display may also show if thevehicle is currently in V4, V6 orV8 mode.



Average Vehicle Speed

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVERAGE SPEED displays.This display shows the averagespeed in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (MPH).

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressto scroll through the following menuitems:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaininguseful life. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil ona schedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑34. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑7. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset theOIL LIFE display yourself after eachoil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset theOIL LIFE display accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

Side Blind Zone Alert

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset buttonto select between ON or OFF.If you choose ON, the systemwill be turned on. If you chooseOFF, the system will be turned off.When the SBZA system is turnedoff, the DIC will display the SIDEBLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEMOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off.See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5‑36 andSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9‑56 for more information.



Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between metricor English units of measurement.Once in this display, press theset/reset button to select betweenENGLISH or METRIC units.All of the vehicle information willthen be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

Tire Pressure

On vehicles with the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS),the pressure for each tire can beviewed in the DIC. The tire pressurewill be shown in either poundskilopascals (kPa) or per squareinch (psi). Press the vehicleinformation button until the DICdisplays FRONT TIRES kPa (PSI)LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press thevehicle information button againuntil the DIC displays REARTIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you toadd air to a specific tire will appearin the display. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57 and Tire Messages onpage 5‑39 for more information.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Battery Voltage

This display shows the currentbattery voltage. If the voltage is inthe normal range, the value willdisplay. For example, the displaymay read BATTERY VOLTAGE13 VOLTS. If the voltage is low,the display will show LOW. If thevoltage is high, the display will showHIGH. Your vehicle's chargingsystem regulates voltage based onthe state of the battery. The batteryvoltage may fluctuate when viewingthis information on the DIC.

This is normal. See ChargingSystem Light on page 5‑18 for moreinformation. If there is a problemwith the battery charging system,the DIC will display a message.See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑31.

Oil Pressure

This display will show the oilpressure in either poundskilopascals (kPa) or per squareinch (psi).

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5‑6 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5‑6 for more information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicleor some action may be neededto correct a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do notrequire immediate action canbe acknowledge and clearedby pressing any DIC button.

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

When the vehicle’s batteryis severely discharged, thismessage will display and fourchimes will sound. Start the vehicleimmediately. If the vehicle is notstarted and the battery continuesto discharge, the climate controls,heated seats, and audio systemswill shut off and the vehicle mayrequire a jump start. These systemswill function again after the vehicleis started.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problemwith the battery charging system.Under certain conditions, the

charging system light may also turnon in the instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light onpage 5‑18. Driving with this problemcould drain the battery. Turn off allunnecessary accessories. Have theelectrical system checked as soonas possible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑21. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.



SERVICE BRAKES SOON

This message displays if there isa problem with the brake system.If this message appears, stop assoon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Restart the vehicle andcheck for the message on the DICdisplay. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, the brake systemneeds service. See your dealer.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and achime sounds if the driver door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays and achime sounds if the hood is notfully closed. Stop and turn offthe vehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver side rear door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the front passenger dooris not fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the liftgate or liftglassis open while the ignition is inON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle andcheck the liftgate and liftglass.Restart the vehicle and check forthe message on the DIC display.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.



Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) TURNED OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑14. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. Whenthe coolant temperature returnsto normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on.You can continue to driveyour vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22 for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑14.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑25 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22 for more information.

This message displays and achime sounds if the enginecooling system reaches unsafetemperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.



Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil,be sure to reset the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11 for information on howto reset the message. See EngineOil on page 10‑7 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 for moreinformation.

ENGINE OIL HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil becomes hotter than thenormal operating temperature. Stopand allow the vehicle to idle until itcools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑14.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stopthe vehicle as soon as possible.Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10‑7.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and achime sounds when the coolingsystem temperature gets too hotand the engine further enters theengine coolant protection mode.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22 for further information.

This message also displayswhen the vehicle's engine poweris reduced. Reduced enginepower can affect the vehicle'sability to accelerate. If this messageis on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. The performancemay be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehiclemay be driven at a reduced speedwhile this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.



Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and achime sounds if the fuel level islow. Refuel as soon as possible.See Fuel Gauge on page 5‑13and Fuel on page 9‑63 for moreinformation.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑18. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9‑68. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

SERVICE LEFT HEADLAMPASSEMBLY

On some models, this messagewill be displayed when the leftheadlamp is out and needs to beserviced. See “LED Lighting” inLED Lighting on page 10‑39 formore information.

SERVICE RIGHT HEADLAMPASSEMBLY

On some models, this messagewill be displayed when the rightheadlamp is out and needs to beserviced. See “LED Lighting” inLED Lighting on page 10‑39 formore information.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (3/4 of a mile). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the offposition.



Object Detection SystemMessages

PARKING ASSIST BLOCKEDSEE OWNERS MANUAL

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there issomething interfering with the parkassist system. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑54 formore information.

PARKING ASSIST OFF

After the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remindthe driver that the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display.To turn the URPA system back on,see Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑54.

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system.Do not use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑54 for more information.See your dealer for service.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONEALERT SYSTEM

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system and thismessage displays, both SBZAdisplays will remain on indicatingthere is a problem with the SBZAsystem. If these displays remain onafter continued driving, the systemneeds service. See your dealer.See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9‑56 for more information.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFF

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thismessage displays when theSBZA system has been turned off.See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9‑56 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑26 for moreinformation.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thismessage displays when the SBZAsystem is disabled because thesensor is blocked and cannotdetect vehicles in your blind zone.The sensor may be blocked bymud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. Thismessage may also display duringheavy rain or due to road spray.It may also come on when driving inisolated areas with no guardrails,trees, or road signs and light traffic.Your vehicle does not need service.



For cleaning instructions, see“Washing Your Vehicle” in ExteriorCare on page 10‑97. See Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) on page 9‑56 formore information.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak andthis message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem.You should see your dealer forservice. The vehicle is safe to drive,however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM

This message displays when theRoad Sensing Suspension (RSS)system is not operating properly.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messagedisplays, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See your dealer forservice. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑47 for more information.

STABILITRAK OFF

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak,this message displays whenyou turn off StabiliTrak, or whenthe stability control has beenautomatically disabled. To limitwheel spin and realize thefull benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrakon. However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if your vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snowand you want to rock your vehicleto attempt to free it, or if youare driving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheelspin. See If the Vehicle is Stuck onpage 9‑23. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑47.



There are several conditions thatcan cause this message to appear.. One condition is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The message also displays if thebrake system warning light is on.See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑21.

. The message could displayif the stability system takeslonger than usual to completeits diagnostic checks due todriving conditions.

. The message displays if anengine or vehicle relatedproblem has been detectedand the vehicle needs service.See your dealer.

The message turns off as soonas the conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when the TractionControl System (TCS) is turned off.Adjust your driving accordingly.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑47 for more information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there isa problem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16 andAirbag System on page 3‑39 formore information.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2‑15 for moreinformation.



Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part onthe TPMS is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑23.Several conditions may causethis message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑60 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem withthe TPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection on page 10‑64,Tire Rotation on page 10‑64,Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 10‑59, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57 for more information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires needs to be checked.This message also displays LEFTFRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right

front), LEFT RR (left rear),or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicatethe location of the low tire. The lowtire pressure warning light will alsocome on. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 5‑23. You can receive morethan one tire pressure message at atime. To read the other messagesthat may have been sent at thesame time, press the set/resetbutton or the trip odometer resetstem. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soonas you can. Have the tire pressureschecked and set to those shown onthe Tire Loading Information label.See Tires on page 10‑50, VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑24, and TirePressure on page 10‑57. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See “DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons)” earlier in thissection.



Transmission Messages

MANUAL SHIFT

This message displays when theautomatic transmission is in manualmode. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑43 for more information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could leadto costly repairs that would notbe covered by the warranty.Do not drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluidor while the transmissiontemperature warning is displayed.

This message displays along withfour chimes if the transmission fluidin the vehicle gets hot. Driving withthe transmission fluid temperaturehigh can cause damage to the

vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let itidle to allow the transmission tocool. This message clears andthe chime stops when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low.Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26 for more information.

VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle may havecustomization capabilities thatallow you to program certainfeatures to one preferred setting.Customization features can onlybe programmed to one settingon the vehicle and cannot beprogrammed to a preferredsetting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.



Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization buttonto scroll through the availablecustomizable options.

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

DEUTSCH: All messages willappear in German.

ITALIANO: All messages willappear in Italian.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

ARABIC: All messages will appearin Arabic.

CHINESE: All messages willappear in Chinese.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press theset/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.



AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).





REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectthe type of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doorsand liftgate with the power doorlock switch and a door or the liftgateis open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature to

work. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice.See Delayed Locking on page 2‑8for more information.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectthe amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on whenit is dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turnedfrom ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for 1 minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for 2 minutes.





APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlamps turn on briefly during lowlight periods after unlocking thevehicle using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lamps will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lamps will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.

NO CHANGE : No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.


AUTO HIGH BEAMS

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select to have theIntelliBeam system turned off or on.See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

Press the customization button untilAUTO HIGH BEAMS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): The IntelliBeamsystem will be turned off.

ON: The IntelliBeam system will beturned on.





CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


PARK TILT MIRRORS

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the outside mirror(s)will automatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑18for more information.

Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driveroutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver andpassenger outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).





EASY EXIT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See “Memory Features” inPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3for more information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT RECALL appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

DOOR BUTTON ONLY: Noautomatic seat exit recall will occur.The recall will only occur afterpressing the easy exit seat button.

BUTTON AND KEY OUT(default): If the features areenabled through the EASY EXITSETUP menu, the driver seat willmove back, and if the vehicle has

the power tilt wheel feature, thepower steering column will move upwhen the key is removed from theignition or after pressing the easyexit seat button.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat andsteering column will stay in theoriginal exit position, unless amemory recall took place priorto removing the key again.



EASY EXIT SETUP

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select which areas willrecall with the automatic easy exitseat feature. It also allows you toturn off the automatic easy exitfeature. See “Memory Features” inPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlierfor more information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SETUP appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: No automatic seat exit willrecall.

SEAT ONLY: The driver seat willrecall.

TILT ONLY: The steering wheel tiltfeature will recall.



SEAT & TILT (default): The driverseat and the steering wheel tiltfeature will recall.



MEMORY SEAT RECALL

This feature allows you to selectyour preference for the remotememory seat recall feature. See“Memory Features” in Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil MEMORY SEAT RECALLappears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.

Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver seat, and onsome vehicles, the outside mirrorswill automatically move to thestored driving position when theunlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteris pressed. On some vehicles withthe adjustable throttle and brakepedal feature, the pedals will alsoautomatically move.



REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.





DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED

This feature allows you to enable ordisable the digital speedometer onthe DIC.

Press the customization buttonuntil DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEEDappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: The digital speedometer willbe disabled.

ON (default): The digitalspeedometer will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be setto their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization buttonuntil PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURESETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.



Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

Vehicles with the Universal RemoteSystem will have these buttonslocated in the headliner.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use this system with anygarage door opener that does nothave the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful tohave another person assist withprogramming the transmitter.



Be sure to keep the originalremote control transmitter foruse in other vehicles, as well asfor future programming. Only theoriginal remote control transmitteris needed for Fixed Codeprogramming. The programmedbuttons should be erased when thevehicle is sold or the lease ends.See “Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons” in this section.

Park the vehicle outside of thegarage when programming a garagedoor. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage dooror gate that is being programmed.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728or go to www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldafter 1996 are Rolling Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle,press the two outside buttonsat the same time for one totwo seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. In the garage, locate thegarage door opener receiver(motor-head unit). Find the“Learn” or “Smart” button.It can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unitand may be a colored button.Press this button. After pressingthis button, complete thefollowing steps in less than30 seconds.



3. Immediately return to thevehicle. Press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonthat will be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator light,above the selected button,should slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second,release the button whenthe garage door moves.The indicator light will blinkrapidly until programming iscomplete.

5. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Rolling Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1 through 5, choosing a

different function button in Step 3than what was used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work,the garage door opener is probablya Fixed Code unit. Follow theprogramming instructions that followfor a Fixed Code garage dooropener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728or go to www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldbefore 1996 are Fixed Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify that the garage dooropener is a Fixed Code unit,remove the battery cover on thehand-held transmitter suppliedby the manufacturer of thegarage door opener motor.If there is a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above,the garage door opener is aFixed Code unit. If you do notsee a row of dip switches, returnto the previous section forProgramming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code.



Your hand-held transmitter canhave between 8 to 12 dipswitches depending on thebrand of transmitter.

The garage door openerreceiver (motor head unit)could also have a row of dipswitches that can be used whenprogramming the UniversalHome Remote. If the totalnumber of switches on themotor head and hand-heldtransmitter are different, or if thedip switch settings are different,use the dip switch settings onthe motor head unit to programthe Universal Home Remote.The motor head dip switchsettings can also be usedwhen the original hand-heldtransmitter is not available.

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Three Positions

The panel of switches might notappear exactly as they do inthe examples above, but theyshould be similar.

The switch positions on thehand-held transmitter could belabeled as follows:. A switch in the up position

could be labeled as “Up,”“+,” or “On.”

. A switch in the downposition could be labeledas “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

. A switch in the middleposition could be labeled as“Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

2. Write down the 8 to 12 switchsettings from left to right asfollows:. When a switch is in the up

position, write “Left.”. When a switch is in the

down position, write “Right.”



. If a switch is set betweenthe up and down position,write “Middle.”

The switch settingswritten down in Step 2now become the buttonstrokes to be enteredinto the Universal HomeRemote in Step 4. Be sureto enter the switch settingswritten down in Step 2,in order from left to right,into the Universal HomeRemote, when completingStep 4.

3. From inside your vehicle,first firmly press all threebuttons at the same timefor about three seconds.Release the buttons to put theUniversal Home Remote intoprogramming mode.

A. Left Button (“Up” “+” or “On”)

B. Middle Button (“Middle” “0” or“Neutral”)

C. Right Button (“Down” “−”or “Off”)

4. The indicator lights will blinkslowly. Enter each switchsetting from Step 2 into yourvehicle's Universal HomeRemote. You will have two andone-half minutes to completeStep 4. Now press one button onthe Universal Home Remote foreach switch setting as follows:. If you wrote “Left,” press

the left button (A) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Right,” pressthe right button (C) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Middle,” pressthe middle button (B) in thevehicle.

5. After entering all of the switchpositions, once again firmlypress and release all threebuttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.



6. Press and hold the button thatwill be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator lightabove the selected buttonshould slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the buttonwhen the garage door moves.The indicator light will blinkrapidly until programming iscomplete.

8. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Fixed Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1-8, choosing a differentbutton in Step 6 than what wasused for the garage door opener.

Universal Remote SystemOperationPress and hold the appropriatebutton for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come onwhile the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming UniversalHome Remote Buttons

Any of the three buttons can bereprogrammed by repeating theinstructions.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase either Rolling Codeor Fixed Code settings on theUniversal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons at the same time forapproximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, locateddirectly above the buttons,begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights beginto blink, release both buttons.The codes from all buttons willbe erased.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑5 or Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-8Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Battery Load Management . . . 6-11Battery Power Protection . . . . 6-12

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.


6-2 Lighting

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

P (Off): Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below.. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

When the headlamps are turnedon while the vehicle is on, theheadlamps will turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlampsare turned on while the vehicle isoff, the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before automaticallyturning off to prevent the batteryfrom being drained. Turn theheadlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on positionto make the headlamps stay onfor an additional 10 minutes.


Lighting 6-3

IntelliBeam® IntelligentHigh-Beam Headlamp ControlSystem

For vehicles with this feature, besure to read this entire sectionbefore using it.

IntelliBeam is an enhancement tothe vehicle's headlamp system.Using a digital light sensor on therearview mirror, this system will turnthe vehicle's high-beam headlampson and off according to surroundingtraffic conditions.

The IntelliBeam system turns thehigh-beam headlamps on when it isdark enough, there is no other trafficpresent, and the IntelliBeam systemis enabled.

Turning On and EnablingIntelliBeam

Press and release the IntelliBeambutton on the inside rear viewmirror. The IntelliBeam indicatoron the mirror will turn on to letyou know the system has beenturned on. Once the system hasbeen turned on, it will remain oneach time the vehicle is started.Additionally, the IntelliBeam systemmust be enabled.

To enable the IntelliBeam system,turn the exterior lamp controlto AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction lever in its neutralposition. The High-Beam On Lightwill appear on the instrument panelcluster when the high-beams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

IntelliBeam will only activate yourhigh-beams when driving over32 km/h (20 mph).

The high-beam headlamps willremain on, under the automaticcontrol of IntelliBeam, until any ofthe following situations occur:. The system detects an

approaching vehicle'sheadlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is brightenough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below24 km/h (15 mph).


6-4 Lighting

. The headlamp stalk is movedforward to the high-beamposition.

When either of these conditionsoccur, the IntelliBeam featurewill be disabled and theIntelliBeam light in the mirrorwill turn off until the high-beamstalk is returned to the neutralposition.

. If IntelliBeam was usinglow-beams prior to this action,the IntelliBeam feature will betemporarily disabled until thestalk is returned to the neutralposition.

. The exterior lamp controlis turned to any settingexcept AUTO.

When this occurs, IntelliBeamwill be disabled until the controlis turned back to the AUTOposition.

. The IntelliBeam system is turnedoff at the inside rearview mirror.

IntelliBeam may not turn off thehigh-beams if the system cannotdetect other vehicle's lampsbecause of any of the following:. The others vehicle's lamp(s) are

missing, damaged, obstructedfrom view or otherwiseundetected.

. The other vehicle's lamp(s) arecovered with dirt, snow and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamp(s)cannot be detected due to denseexhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist or other airborneobstructions.

. Your vehicle's windshield isdirty, cracked or obstructed bysomething that blocks the viewof the IntelliBeam light sensor.

. Your vehicle's windshield iscovered with ice, dirt, haze orother obstructions.

. Your vehicle is loaded suchthat the front end of the vehiclepoints upward, causing theIntelliBeam sensor to aim highand not detect headlamps andtaillamps.

. You are driving on winding orhilly roads.

You may need to manually disableor cancel the high-beam headlampsby turning the low-beam headlampson, if any of the above conditionsexist.


Lighting 6-5

Disabling and ResettingIntelliBeam at the Rearview Mirror

IntelliBeam can be disabled byusing the controls on the insiderearview mirror.

AUTO3 (On/Off): To disablethe system, press this buttonon the inside rearview mirror.The IntelliBeam indicator will turn offand will not come back on until theIntelliBeam button is pressed again.

(Stalk Disable): When IntelliBeamhas turned on the high-beams,pull or push the high-beam stalk.This will disable IntelliBeam.The IntelliBeam indicator on themirror will turn off. To re-enableIntelliBeam, press the IntelliBeambutton on the mirror.

A different sensitivity setting isavailable for dealer diagnostics.This is done by pushing and holding

this button for 20 seconds until theIntelliBeam indicator light flashesthree times. If you accidentallyactivate this, the vehicle's settingwill automatically be reset each timethe ignition is turned off and thenon again.

Cleaning the IntelliBeam LightSensor

The light sensor is located on theinside of the vehicle in front of theinside rearview mirror.

Clean the light sensor window,periodically, using glass cleaner ona soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensorwindow. Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the surface of the sensorwindow.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the key is out of the ignition.To turn off the chime, turn theheadlamp switch to off or AUTO andthen back on, or close and re-openthe door. In the AUTO mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis in LOCK/OFF or remains on untilthe headlamp delay ends (if enabledin the DIC). See “Exit Lighting”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.


6-6 Lighting

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer53 (Headlamp High/LowBeam Changer): To change theheadlamps from low to high beam,push the lever toward the instrumentpanel. To return to low-beamheadlamps, pull the multifunctionlever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beams are on, thisindicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signala driver in front of you that youwant to pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps willturn on. They will stay on as longas you hold the lever toward you.The high-beam indicator on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

The low‐beam headlamps must beon for the flash‐to‐pass featureto work.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in Park.. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL system is on,only the DRL lamps are on.The taillamps, sidemarker,instrument panel lights, andother lamps will not be on.


Lighting 6-7

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL lamps, turnthe exterior lamps control to theOFF position and then release.For vehicles first sold in Canada,the transmission must be in theP (Park) position before the DRLlamps can be turned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turnson the headlamps at the normalbrightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampsswitch to the off position and thenrelease it.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel in the defroster grillewhich regulates when theautomatic headlamps turn on.Do not cover the sensor, otherwisethe headlamps will come onwhenever the ignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving througha parking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect the

system. The automatic headlampsystem is only affected when thelight sensor detects a change inlighting lasting longer than thedelay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately one minutefor the automatic headlamp systemto change if it is bright enoughoutside. During that delay, theinstrument panel cluster may notbe as bright as usual. Make surethe instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position.See Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑9.

To idle the vehicle with theautomatic headlamp system off,turn the control to the off position.


6-8 Lighting

The headlamps will also stayon after you exit the vehicle.This feature can be programmedusing the Driver Information Center(DIC). See Vehicle Personalizationon page 5‑40.

The regular headlamp system canbe turned on when needed.

Hazard Warning Flashers| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button located on top ofthe steering column, to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble. Pressagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lane

change. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flashthree times. It will flash six timesif tow-haul mode is active. Holdingthe turn signal lever for more thanone second will cause the turnsignals to flash until you releasethe lever.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑42.


Lighting 6-9

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 miles), a chimewill sound at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL ON will also appear in theDriver Information Control (DIC).To turn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, thecontrol is located next to the exteriorlamps control on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

# (Fog Lamps): Press the buttonto turn the fog lamps on or off.A indicator light comes on inthe instrument panel cluster.The ignition must be in theON/RUN position for the foglamps to come on.

When the fog lamps are turned on,the headlamps automaticallyturn on.

When the headlamps are changedto high-beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsgo off, the fog lamps will come onagain.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): This feature controlsthe brightness of the instrumentpanel lights and is located nextto the exterior lamps control.


6-10 Lighting

Push the knob to extend out andthen it can be turned.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten ordim the instrument panel lights.Turning the knob to the farthestclockwise position turns on thedome lamps.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps are located in theoverhead console.

They come on when any door isopened and turn off after all thedoors are closed.

Turn the instrument panelbrightness knob located belowthe dome lamp override button,clockwise to the farthest position tomanually turn on the dome lamps.The dome lamps remain on until theknob is turned counterclockwise.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

k (Dome Off): Press the buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with front readinglamps in the overhead console,press the button located next tothe lamp to turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.


Lighting 6-11

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe vehicle has an illuminated entryfeature.

When the doors are opened, thedome lamps will come on if thedome override button is in theextended position. If the domeoverride button is pressed in,the lamps will not come on.

Exit LightingThe interior lamps come on whenthe key is removed from the ignition.They turn off automatically in20 seconds. The lights do not comeon if the dome override button ispressed in.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinningfast enough at idle to produce allthe power that is needed for veryhigh electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on,such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.


6-12 Lighting

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERY LOWSTART VEHICLE. If this messagedisplays, it is recommended that thedriver reduce the electrical loads asmuch as possible and restart thevehicle. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑31.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamps if they are left on for morethan 10 minutes when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. This helps to preventthe battery from running down.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-3Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Rear Side WindowAntenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-18

Audio PlayersCD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System(Overhead) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System(Headrest DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

NavigationUsing the NavigationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62Navigation Symbols . . . . . . . . . 7-64Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83Global PositioningSystem (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96

Vehicle Positioning . . . . . . . . . . 7-97Problems with RouteGuidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97

If the System NeedsService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98Database CoverageExplanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Voice RecognitionVoice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102


7-2 Infotainment System

IntroductionRead this manual thoroughly tobecome familiar with how thenavigation system operates.

The navigation system includesnavigation and audio functions.

Keeping your eyes on the roadand your mind on the drive isimportant for safe driving. Thenavigation system has built-infeatures intended to help keepyour eyes on the road and mind onthe drive. A few features may bedisabled while driving. Note thatthese functions will be grayed-out.A grayed-out function indicates it isnot available when the vehicle ismoving.

All functions are available when thevehicle is parked. Do the followingbefore driving:. Become familiar with the

navigation system operation,control buttons on the faceplate,and touch-sensitive screenbuttons of the navigationsystem.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up the navigation featuresbefore beginning driving, suchas entering an address or apreset destination.

. Set up your phone numbersin advance so they can becalled easily with the pressof a single button or a singlevoice command (for navigationsystems equipped with phonecapability).

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often while using thenavigation system could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Focus yourattention on driving.

{ WARNING

Avoid looking too long or toooften at the moving map on thenavigation screen. This couldcause a crash and you or otherscan be injured or killed. Use theturn-by-turn voice guidancedirections whenever possible.



Use the navigation system to:. Plan a route.. Select a destination using

various methods and choices.. Follow turn-by-turn route

and map guidance with voiceprompts, only if permitted bytraffic laws, controls, andconditions.

Always be alert and obey trafficand roadway laws and instructions,regardless of the guidance fromthe navigation system. Becausethe navigation system uses streetmap information that does notinclude all traffic restrictions orthe latest road changes, it maysuggest using a road that is nowclosed for construction or a turnthat is prohibited by signs at theintersection. Because the systemuses limited information, you mustalways evaluate whether followingthe system's directions is safe andlegal for the current conditions.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

OverviewWhen the navigation system isturned on, a screen may appearwith the information below, andyou must read and acknowledgethe information it contains.

After you acknowledge the startup information you will be ableto access the NAV (navigation)and DEST (destination) functions.Once accessed, you can enter ordelete information in the navigationsystem or access other functions.See instructions later in this section.

Every fifty times the vehicleis started and the navigationsystem is turned on, the Cautionscreen appears. After reading thecaution, select OK to load the mapinformation. If OK is not selected, allcontrol buttons except for NAV andDEST can be accessed. You canalso press the NAV control button tohave this Caution screen appear.

When getting started, set thenavigation system to yourpreference or delete informationyou may have entered usingvarious options.



A. Full map Touch Screen Button

B. No GPS Symbol

C. North Up/Heading Up Symbol

D. Map Scale

E. 0 (Zoom In) Touch ScreenButton

F. Mark Touch Screen Button

G. Z (Eject)

H. O /n (Power/Volume)

I. yz (Scan Up/Down)

J. AUDIO

K. FAV (Favorite)

L. 5 (Phone)



M. e (Sound)

N. Source (AM, FM, XM, CD, etc.)

O. Clock Touch Screen Button

P. POI (Point of Interest) TouchScreen Button

Q. 1 (Zoom Out) Touch ScreenButton

R. Auxiliary Jack

S. y © ¨ z (Seek) Key(Previous/Next)

T. w (Tune) Knob

U. NAV (Navigation)

V. RPT (Repeat)

W. DEST (Destination)

X. CONFIG (Configure)

Language — English/Metric

To change the language of thenavigation screens or to changethe navigation screens from Englishor metric, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑26 formore information.

Deleting Personal Information

This navigation system can recordand store personal informationsuch as names and addresses.Delete this information whenselling your vehicle or returning aleased vehicle. See “Edit AddressBook — Edit/View” under ConfigureMenu on page 7‑83 for deletinginformation from the address book.

Limit Features While Driving

The navigation system may havethis feature.

Touch the Limit Features WhileDriving screen button to turn theability to limit functions on and offwhile driving. When this screenbutton is highlighted, the followingfunctions are limited while driving:. Music Navigator Scrolling. Radio Category Scrolling. Navigation Menu Scrolling and

some functions

See “Category” under AM-FM Radioon page 7‑10 for more information.See “From Map” under Destinationon page 7‑69 for more information.

Some functions will remain limitedregardless of the setting.



Storing Radio Station Presets

To set preset radio stations, do thefollowing:

1. Press O to turn the system on.

2. Press the AUDIO control buttonand select the desired band(AM, FM, or XM (if equipped)).

3. Use thew (tuning) knob orthe SEEK arrows to tune to thedesired station.

4. Press and hold one of the fivepreset screen buttons, at thebottom of the screen, until abeep is heard.

5. Repeat the steps for eachpreset.

See “Storing Radio Station Presets”under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑10for more information.

Setting the Clock

The navigation system time and theanalog clock operate independently.Changing the time through thenavigation system does not changethe time on the analog clock.See Clock on page 5‑8 tochange the analog clock time.

To set the time for the navigationsystem:

1. Press the CONFIG controlbutton to enter the configuremenu options, then pressCONFIG again, repeatedlyuntil the time is selected ortouch the time screen button.

2. Press the Hours and Minutes− (minus) and + (plus) signs todecrease or to increase the time.

See “Setting the Clock” underConfigure Menu on page 7‑83for more information.

Entering an Address and Pointof Interest, and Storing PresetDestinations

Entering an Address

Enter a destination by inputting thecity name first:


2. A caution may appear. Press OKto proceed.

3. Press the DEST control button.

4. Press2 (Address Entry).

5. Select the state/province screenbutton, if needed, to change thecurrent state or province. A listof all of the available states andprovinces appear. Select thestate or province.



6. Once a state or province hasbeen selected the City namecategory is automaticallyselected for entry.

If five or less names areavailable, a list displays.If more than five are available,the List screen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available cities.Select this button to view the listand select a city.

7. Once a city has been selectedthe Street name category isautomatically selected for entry.

If five or less streets areavailable for the selected city,the system displays the listof streets. If more than fivestreets are available the systemdisplays the alpha keyboard.Start entering the street name.If five or less names are

available, a list displays.If more than five are available,the List screen button displays anumber. This button representsthe number of available streets.Select this button to view the listand select a street.

8. Once a street has beenselected, select the House #screen button to enter the housenumber. The system displaysthe house number range thatis available for the street.

9. Select GO. A map screen, withthe destination marked appears.

10. Select the route preference(Fastest, Shortest, or Other).The system calculates andhighlights the route.

11. Select Start Guidance. You arenow ready to start your route.

See “Address Entry” underDestination on page 7‑69 for moreinformation.

Entering a Point of Interest (POI)

To set a destination by entering aPoint of Interest (POI), do thefollowing:




4. Pressi Point of Interest.




6. Enter the specific title of thePOI in the POI name space(e.g. Washington Monument).

If five or less names areavailable, a list displays.If more than five are available,the List screen button displays anumber. This button representsthe number of available POIs.Select this button to view the list.

7. Select GO next to the POI.A map screen, with thedestination marked appears.


9. Select Start Guidance. The routeis now ready to be started.

See “Point of Interest (POI)” underDestination on page 7‑69 for moreinformation.

Storing Preset Destinations




Enter a destination. SeeDestination on page 7‑69 formore information on how toenter a destination.

4. Press the DEST control button,the Route screen displays.Press Final Destination orStopover. The informationscreen displays for that location.Press Add to Address Book.The address book screenappears.

5. Select the Name screen button.An alpha-keyboard displays.Enter the name. Select theBack screen button.

6. Press and hold one of thescreen buttons at the bottomof the screen until the nameappears in the screen buttonon the display.

The name appears in that presetdestination screen button andis now available to select fromthe Destination Entry screen.See “Using Your Stored PresetDestinations” in this section toselect it as a destination.

See “Adding or ChangingPreset Destinations” underDestination on page 7‑69 formore information on how toadd preset destinations.



Using Your Stored PresetDestinations

These destinations are available forselection while driving.




4. Select one of the availablepreset destination screenbuttons. A map screen, with thedestination marked appears.



See “Preset Destination” underDestination on page 7‑69 for moreinformation.

Canceling Guidance

Guidance is canceled once the finaldestination is reached. To cancelguidance prior to arrival at the finaldestination:


2. Press Cancel Guidance.

3. Press OK to confirm.

Guidance Volume

Adjust the volume of voice guidanceprompts:

1. Press the CONFIG controlbutton to enter the menuoptions, then press CONFIGagain, repeatedly until Navis selected or press the Navscreen button.

2. Press Voice Prompt.

3. Press + or – screen buttons toincrease or to decrease thevolume of the voice prompts.The system responds with theadjusted voice level.

See “Voice Prompt ” underConfigure Menu on page 7‑83 formore information.

Cleaning the Display Screen

Use a soft clean cotton clothdampened with clean water.



Radio

AM-FM RadioNotice: Before adding anysound equipment to the vehicle,such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobiletelephone, or two-way radio,make sure that it can be addedby checking with your dealer.Also, check federal rulescovering mobile radio andtelephone units. If soundequipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly.Added sound equipment caninterfere with the operation ofthe vehicle's engine, radio,or other systems, and evendamage them. The vehicle'ssystems can interfere with theoperation of sound equipmentthat has been added.

Notice: The chime signalsrelated to safety belts, parkingbrake, and other functionsof the vehicle operate throughthe navigation system. If thatequipment is replaced oradditional equipment is addedto the vehicle, the chimesmay not work. Make sure thatreplacement or additionalequipment is compatible with thevehicle before installing it. See“Accessories and Modifications”in the vehicle's owner manual.

Playing the Radio

O /n (Power/Volume):

1. Press to turn the audio systemon and off.

2. Turn to increase or to decreasethe volume.

3. Press and hold for more thantwo seconds to turn off thenavigation system, the RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) videoscreen, and Rear Seat Audio(RSA). If the vehicle has notbeen turned off, press this knobto turn RSE and RSA back onand to continue playback of thelast active source.

w (Tuning Knob): Turn to go tothe next or previous frequency ordisc track or chapter. See CD/DVDPlayer on page 7‑19 or MP3 onpage 7‑28 for more information.

AUDIO: Press to display the audioscreen. Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM, if equipped, Disc,or AUX (Auxiliary), or touch thescreen button. See CD/DVD Playeron page 7‑19, MP3 on page 7‑28,and Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑31for more information.



Finding a Station

AM Source Shown, Other SourcesSimilar

If viewing a map screen, pressthe source screen (AM, FM, XM(if equipped), CD, etc.) button.The display splits between theaudio screen and the map screen.All station-changing functions canbe performed from this screen.

FM Source Shown, Other SourcesSimilar

If you do not want to view a splitscreen or you are not on a mapscreen, press AUDIO.

AM/FM/XM: Press the source(AM, FM, or XM, if equipped) screenbutton or press the AUDIO controlbutton repeatedly until the desiredsource is highlighted.

FM Source Shown, Other SourcesSimilar

Category: Press the screen button,located in the middle of the screen,to get a list of all the selected bandstations in the area. Use the upand down arrows to scroll thefrequencies. Press the desiredfrequency.



XM (if equipped) lists also contain acategory to select and the stationsor channels that have broadcaststhat relate to that category. For XM(if equipped), press the left and rightarrow screen buttons to changecategories. The station informationappears on the display. See “RadioMenu” in this section to add andremove XM categories from thecategory list. Removed categoriesdo not appear on the category listscreen or when the right and leftarrow category screen buttonsare used.

FM lists may also contain acategory to select if stations inthe broadcast area support RadioData Systems (RDS).

2 Refresh List: Press to refreshthe list of AM or FM stations.

When viewing a map screen, thename of the station or channeldisplays.

y © ¨ z (Seek):

1. To seek stations, press the up ordown arrows to go to the next orprevious station.

2. To scan stations, press andhold either arrow for morethan two seconds. The radiogoes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to thenext station.

3. To stop scanning, press eitherarrow again.

Storing Radio Station Presets

This feature stores a mix of up to30 AM, FM, and XM (if equipped)preset stations. To store presets:


2. If viewing a map screen, pressthe source screen button, pressthe AUDIO control button,or press the FAV (favorite)control button.

3. Select the band.

4. Seek, scan, or tune to thedesired station, to select thestation.

5. Press and hold one of the presetscreen buttons for more thantwo seconds or until a beep isheard.

6. Repeat the steps for eachpreset.



Sound Menu

e (Sound): Press this key orpress the CONFIG control buttonto access the Sound menu toadjust the treble, midrange, bass,fade, balance, and Digital SignalProcessing (DSP). The systemautomatically stores audioadjustment settings as changesare made for each audio sourceincluding AM, FM, XM (if equipped),CD, and AUX.

Setting the Tone

TREBLE: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the treble. If a stationis weak or has static, decrease thetreble.

MID (Midrange): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the midrange.

BASS: Press + or − to increase ordecrease the bass.

Adjusting the Speakers

L/R (Left/Right) (Balance): Toadjust the balance between the leftand the right speakers, press andhold the L or R screen buttons.

Front/Rear (Fade): To adjust thefade between the front and the rearspeakers, press and hold the Frontor Rear screen buttons.

Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The system has Digital SignalProcessing (DSP). DSP providesa choice of four different listeningexperiences. DSP can be usedwhile listening to the audio system.Not all DSP modes are availablefor all source types. The type ofDSP selected is displayed on thestatus line.

Select from the following DSPsettings:

Normal: Adjusts the audio fornormal mode. This provides thebest sound quality for all seatingpositions.

Surround (Centerpoint®): EnablesBose Centerpoint signal processingthat produces a surround soundlistening experience from a CD orXM (if equipped) stereo digital audiosource. Centerpoint delivers fiveindependent audio channels fromconventional two channel stereorecordings (not available for AMor FM).



Driver: Adjusts the audio to givethe driver the best possible soundquality.

Rear: Adjusts the audio to givethe rear seat occupants the bestpossible sound quality.

2 CH. (Channel): Enhancessurround sound.

5.1 CH. (Channel): Gives a fullaffect of surround sound listening.This button is only available whenplaying DVD video discs thatsupport 5.1 audio and if the RSAis off.

Radio Menu

Press the CONFIG control button toenter the configure menu screen,then press CONFIG repeatedly untilRadio is selected or press the Radioscreen button to make changes forradio information displayed or tolimit features while driving, numberof preset pages, XM (if equipped)categories, and Bose® AudioPilot®.

Limit Features While Driving

Press the Limit Features WhileDriving screen button to turn on andoff the ability to limit functions whiledriving. When this screen button ishighlighted, the following functionsare limited while driving:. Music Navigator Scrolling. Radio Category Scrolling. Navigation Menu Scrolling and

some functions

Number of Preset Pages

Press the Number of Preset Pagesscreen button to change the numberof preset pages, 1 through 6.Each preset page can contain fivepreset stations. Press the desirednumbered screen button.



Bose® AudioPilot®

AudioPilot: The Bose AudioPilotnoise compensation technology.

To use AudioPilot®:

1. Press the CONFIG controlbutton to enter the menu screen,then press CONFIG repeatedlyuntil Radio is selected or pressthe Radio screen button

2. Press Automatic Volume Controlto access the AudioPilot menu.

3. Press ON.

To turn it off, press OFF. When on,AudioPilot® continuously adjuststhe audio system equalization,to compensate for backgroundnoise, so that the music sound isconsistent at the set volume level.

This feature is most effectiveat lower volume settings wherebackground noise can affect howwell the music being played is heardthrough the vehicle's audio system.

At higher volume settings, wherethe music is much louder thanthe background noise, there maybe little or no adjustments byAudioPilot®. For more informationon AudioPilot®, visit www.bose.com/audiopilot.

Remove/Add XM Categories(US and Canada)

Press the Remove/Add XMCategories screen button toremove or add XM categorieswhen selecting XM categoriesfrom the category list screen.The list of XM categories appear onthe screen. Use the arrow screenbuttons to scroll through the list.The categories to remove arehighlighted and the categories toadd are dark in color. Press thecategory to be added or removed.Press the Restore All Categoriesscreen button to add all categoriesthat have been removed.

Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a RadioData System (RDS). RDS featuresare available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation. With RDS, the radiocan do the following:. Receive announcements

concerning local and nationalemergencies

. Display messages from radiostations

This system relies on receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works whenthe information is available.In rare cases, a radio station maybroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

The RDS system is always on.When information is broadcast fromthe FM station that is playing, thestation name or call letters displayson the audio screen.



Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM™ is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is requiredto receive the XM service. If theservice needs to be reactivated, theradio will display “No SubscriptionPlease Renew on channel XM1.”For more information, contactXM at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

When XM™ is active, the channelname and number, song title, andartist displays on the screen.

XM™ Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): XL on the radiodisplay, after the channel name,indicates content with explicitlanguage. These channels, orany others, can be blocked ata customer's request by calling1‐800‐929-2100.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated andno action is required.

No XM signal: The vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™signal. When the vehicle is movedinto an open area, the signal shouldreturn.

Loading XM: The audio systemis processing audio and text datareceived. No action is needed.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service.

Channel Unauth : This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available. The systemis working properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available. The systemis working properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available. The systemis working properly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable. The system is workingproperly.



XM Theftlocked: The XM™receiver may have previously beenin another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM™ receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingyour vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio IDlabel. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there may be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receiver: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivermay have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

No Subscription Please Renew:The XM subscription needs tobe reactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference, somestatic can occur, especially aroundtall buildings or hills, causing thesound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coastto coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada.Just as with FM, tall buildings orhills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fadein and out. In addition, travelingor standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels maycause loss of the XM signal for aperiod of time.



Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on.This interference causes anincreased level of static whilelistening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to theradio, unplug the cellular phoneand turn it off.

Rear Side WindowAntennaThe AM-FM antenna is located inthe passenger rear side windows.Make sure the inside surfaces of therear side windows are not scratchedand that the lines on the glass arenot damaged. If the inside surfacesare damaged, they could interferewith radio reception.

If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space betweenthe grid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insideof the rear side windows mayaffect radio reception or damagethe rear side window antenna.Repairs would not be covered bythe warranty. Do not clear theinside of the rear side windowswith sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere withor distort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused tothe antenna due to metallic tintingmaterials will not be covered bythe warranty.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system(if equipped) may be affected ifthe sunroof is open.



Audio Players

CD/DVD PlayerThe player can be used for CD,MP3, and as a DVD video player.Read this section for moreinformation about DVD video.

When playing an audio CD the rearseat operator can power on theRSE video screen and use theremote control to navigate throughthe tracks on the CD.

CD Player

While playing a CD, the navigationsystem is available.

When you insert a CD, the CDtab displays. If a DSP setting isselected for the CD, it activateseach time you play a CD.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition or

radio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

If an error appears on the display,see “CD/DVD Messages” in thissection.

If viewing a map screen, press theCD screen button. The display splitsbetween the audio screen and themap screen. If you do not want toview a split screen or you are noton a map screen, press the AUDIOcontrol button then press AUDIOagain, repeatedly until CD isselected or press the CD screenbutton.

Z (Eject): To eject a disc:

1. PressZ.

2. The system displays“Ejecting Disc”.

Playing an Audio CD

j / r (Pause/Play): Press to pausethe CD. This button will then changeto the play button. Pressthe play button to play the CD.

Random:

1. Press to hear the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential,order.

2. Press Random again to turn offrandom play.



DISC: Press this screen buttonto view the list of loaded disc(s).Select the disc to play.

r (Rewind):

1. Press and hold this screenbutton to rewind quickly througha track selection. You will hearsound at a reduced volume.

2. Release this screen button tostop rewinding. The display willshow the elapsed time of thetrack.

[ (Forward):

1. Press and hold this screenbutton to fast forward quicklythrough a track selection.You will hear sound at areduced volume.

2. Release this screen button tostop fast forwarding. The displaywill show the elapsed time of thetrack.

y © ¨ z (Seek):

1. To seek tracks, press the uparrow to go to the next track.

2. Press the down arrow to go tothe start of the current track,if more than eight secondshave played.

3. If either arrow is pressed morethan once, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the CD. The soundmutes while seeking.

w (Tuning Knob):

1. Turn counterclockwise one notchto go to the start of the currenttrack, turn it again to go to theprevious track.

2. Turn clockwise to go to the nexttrack.

Playing a DVD

DVD video does not display onthe navigation screen unless thevehicle is in P (Park). It will operateon the rear seat entertainmentscreens while the vehicle is moving.The Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)video screen starts play of theDVD when a DVD video has beeninserted into the CD/DVD slot.The DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the navigationsystem, the Rear Seat Audio (RSA)system, and the remote control.The DVD player can also beused for the rear seat passengerswith the radio off. The rear seatpassengers can power on the videoscreen and use the remote controlto navigate the disc. See the RearSeat Infotainment user guide formore information.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode that is printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.



The DVD slot is compatiblewith most audio CDs, CD-R,CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,DVD+R/RW media along withMP3 and WMA formats.


Once a DVD starts to play, themenu options and cursor screenbuttons will automatically appear.To display the menu Options screenbutton while a DVD is playing, touchanywhere on the screen.

There are three ways to playa DVD:. Once a DVD is inserted, the

system will automatically startplay of the DVD.

. If you are on a map screen,press the DVD screen button.

. Press the AUDIO control button,then press the DVD screenbutton.

When a DVD is loaded, the rearseat passengers can power onthe RSE video screen and use theremote control to navigate throughthe DVD.

O /3 (Power/Volume):

1. Press to turn the system onand off.

2. Turn the knob to increase ordecrease the volume of theaudio system.

3. Press and hold for more thantwo seconds to turn off thenavigation system, RSE videoscreen, and RSA. If the vehiclehas not been tuned off, the RSEand the RSA can be turned backon by pressing this knob and willcontinue play of the last activesource.

DVD Menu Options

Options: Select this screen buttonto view the menu option screenbuttons. Menu options are availablewhen they are highlighted. Somemenu options are only availablewhen the DVD is not playing.

Cursor: Press this button toaccess the cursor menu. The arrowsand other cursor options allow youto navigate the DVD menu options.The cursor menu options are onlyavailable if a DVD has a menu.Use the cursor menu to start a DVDvideo from the disc main menu.

q,Q , r ,R (Arrow Buttons):Press the arrows to move aroundthe DVD menu.

Enter: Press to select thehighlighted option.

Return: Press to go back to theprevious DVD menu.

Back: Press to go back to the mainDVD display screen.



Move: Press to move the cursorbuttons back and forth from thebottom-right corner to the top-leftcorner of the screen.

j / r (Pause/Play):

1. Press to pause the DVD.This button will then changeto the play button.

2. Press the play button to playthe DVD.

3. Press this button in a DVD discmain menu to start the movie.

c (Stop):

1. Press to stop play of the DVD.

2. Press the play button to continueplaying the DVD from where theDVD was stopped.

3. Press this button twice to returnto the beginning of the DVD.

Hide Options: Press to removeall menu options from the display,except Options and Cursor.

Top Menu: Press to display thefirst menu of the DVD. This is notavailable on all DVDs.

Menu: Press to display the DVDmenu of the current area of the DVDthat is playing. This button is notavailable for DVD audio.

Audio: Press to display the audiooptions. Select the audio optionsthat best improve sound quality.This is not available on all DVDsor when the DVD is stopped.This button is not available forDVD audio.

Subtitle: Press to playback thevideo with subtitles. This is notavailable on all DVDs or when theDVD is stopped. This button is notavailable for DVD audio.

Angle: Press to adjust the viewingangle of the DVD. Repeatedly pressthis button to toggle through theangles. This is not available on allDVDs or when the DVD is stopped.This button is not available for DVDaudio.



Search: Press to display thesearch screen. Select Title orChapter Search for DVD videoand Group or Track for DVD audio.The keyboard allows you to type inthe title/chapter/group/track numberthat you would like to watch or listento. This button does not work whenthe DVD is stopped.

Setup: Press to display theDVD Setup screen. This buttonis only available when the DVDis not playing. The DVD Setupscreen allows you to change thebrightness, contrast, and mode,change the viewing on the monitorand to change the initial settings;language, parental level, andaspect.

! (Brightness): Press the up ordown screen arrows to increaseor decrease the brightness of thenavigation screen.

_ (Contrast): Press the up ordown screen arrows to increaseor decrease the contrast of thenavigation screen.

Auto (Automatic): Press so thesystem can automatically adjustthe navigation screen backgrounddepending on exterior lightingconditions.

Night: Press to make thenavigation screen backgroundbrighten.

Day: Press to make the navigationscreen background darken.

Monitor: From the DVD Setupscreen, press to adjust the viewingangle of the DVD on the navigationscreen. This is not available on allDVDs. This button is not availablefor DVD audio

Presse to close the screen in fromthe left and right sides.

PressJ to fill the screen on theleft and right sides.

Pressd to fill the screen on thetop and bottom.

Settings: From the DVD Setupscreen, press to change the defaultaudio, subtitle, and menu

languages, parental level, audio,and to view the aspect of the DVD.These settings are not availableon all DVDs. This button is notavailable for DVD audio.

Audio Language: Press English,Francais, Espanol, Italiano,or Deutsch to change the defaultlanguage that the DVD player usesfor each disc. The audio languagemust be available on the disc.The audio language may varyfor each DVD.



Subtitle Language: Press English,Francais, Espanol, Italiano,or Deutsch to change the defaultlanguage of the subtitles that theDVD player uses for each disc.The subtitle language must beavailable on the disc. The subtitlelanguage may vary for each DVD.

Menu Language: Press English,Francais, Espanol, Italiano,or Deutsch to change the defaultlanguage of the DVD video menus.The menu language must beavailable on the disc. The menulanguage may vary for each DVD.

Parental Level: Press to changethe rating level to only allow theplay of DVDs with a certain rating.The rating selection is 1 through 8,with 1 Kids Safe being a G rating.If the 1 is selected, any DVD with arating above G will not be able to beviewed without entering a password.

When the parental level is firstentered a keyboard will appearon the display and a four-digitpassword will need to be created.Type in a password that you willbe able to remember. Once thepassword is created, you can thenselect a rating level.

If you would like to change therating level, press the ParentalLevel button, then press thePassword button. Type in thepassword and then change therating level.

If the password has been forgotten,contact your dealer.

This may not be available onall DVDs.

Aspect: Press to change theaspect ratio of the DVD. This maynot be available on all DVDs.

y (Next Track/Chapter): Pressto go to the next track or chapter.This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

z (Previous Track/Chapter):

1. Press to return to the start of thecurrent track or chapter.

2. Press again to go to theprevious track or chapter.This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

w (Tuning Knob):

1. Turn this knob counterclockwiseone notch to go to the start ofthe current chapter/track, turnit again to go to the previouschapter/track.

2. Turn this knob clockwise to go tothe next chapter/track.



Care of Your CDs and DVDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth ina mild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it.Wipe the disc from the center tothe outer edge.

Notice: If a label is added to a CDor DVD, or more than one CD orDVD is inserted into the slot at atime, or an attempt is made toplay scratched or damaged CDsor DVDs, the player could bedamaged. While using the CDor DVD player, use only CDs orDVDs in good condition withoutany label, load one CD or DVD ata time, and keep the player andthe loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD orDVD, it could get caught in theplayer. If a CD or DVD is recordedon a personal computer and adescription label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recordedCD or DVD with a soft marker.

CD/DVD Messages

If Disc Read Error appears on thedisplay and/or the CD/DVD comesout, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:. If a CD was inserted with an

invalid or unknown format.. If a DVD is not from a correct

region.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. You are driving on a veryrough road. When the roadbecomes smoother, the CD/DVDshould play.

. The CD/DVD is dirty, scratched,wet, or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There may have been a problemwhile burning the CD/DVD.

. The label may be caught in theCD/DVD player.



If the CD/DVD is not playingcorrectly, for any other reason,try a known good CD/DVD.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

The USB Port, located in the centerconsole, can be used to control aniPod or a USB storage device.

To avoid connection problems,extension cords are notrecommended. Use only thecable that came with the device.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the center console.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port. If the vehicle ison and the USB connection works,“OK to disconnect” and a GM logomay appear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio's display.The iPod music appears on theradio’s display and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and willnot charge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The guidelines that must be metwhile using USB supported files andfolders are:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32



Using the Navigation AudioSystem to Control a USBStorage Device or iPod®

The navigation audio system cancontrol a USB storage device oran iPod by using the radio touchscreens and steering wheelcontrols.

1. Press the AUX button and thenthe USB button.

2. Press center screen button toenter the music navigator mainscreen.

3. Press or tap the left or rightarrow to select desired Categorysuch as: Artist, Album, Genre,etc. A list of that category willdisplay.

4. Select an Artist, Album, or Trackfrom that list.

5. Press the up or down arrowslocated on the side of the screento select one item at a time,or press the top or bottom arrowto jump 10 percent up or downthe list.

6. Press the Back button to goback to the previous screen.

7. Press the Exit button to go backto the main audio screen.

8. Press the left or right arrow toselect desired Category suchas: Artist, Album, Genre, etc.A list of that category willdisplay.

The iPod or USB storage deviceshould not be pulled out from theUSB dock. To safely remove it,press Eject.



A warning message will display for afew seconds.

A message to safely remove thedevice displays.

MP3

Using an MP3 CD

MP3 Format

There are guidelines that must bemet, when creating an MP3 disc.If the guidelines are not met whenrecording a CD-R(W), the CD maynot play. The guidelines are:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, and44.1 kHz.

. Bit rates supported: 32, 40, 48,56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160,192, 224, 256, and 320 kbps.

. ID3 tag information is displayedby the radio if it is available.The radio supports ID3 taginformation v1.0, v1.1, or v2.0.The radio will display a filename,song name, artist name, albumname, and directory name.



. Maximum 32 characters,including spaces, in a file orfolder name.

. Maximum number of folders is100 with a maximum hierarchyof eight folders.

. Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songsby albums using one folder foreach album. Each folder oralbum should contain 18 songsor less.

. It is recommended that there is amaximum of 192 files on a disc.

. The files can be recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW with amaximum capacity of 700MB.

. DVD with MP3 are not playableon this system.

Root Directory

The root directory is treatedas a folder. If the root directoryhas compressed audio files, thedirectory displays as No Folderor ALL.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfoldersand no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advancesto the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audiofiles and the empty folder is notdisplayed or numbered.

No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder.The next and previous folderfunctions will have no function ona CD that was recorded withoutfolders or playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radio willdisplay No Folder.

Order of Play

Play begins from the first trackunder the root directory. When alltracks from the root directory have

been played, play continues fromfiles according to their numericallisting. After playing the last trackfrom the last folder, play beginsagain at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name. The new trackname appears on the display.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe filename does not display.



Playing an MP3

While playing a CD, the navigationsystem is available.

When you insert a CD, the CDtab displays. If a DSP setting isselected for the CD, it will beactivated each time you play a CD.

If you turn off the ignition or radiowith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When you turn on theignition or radio, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play,the track number appears on thedisplay.


If viewing a map screen, press theCD screen button. The display splitsbetween the audio screen and themap screen. If you do not want toview a split screen or you are noton a map screen, press AUDIO,then press AUDIO again, repeatedlyuntil CD is selected or press the CDscreen button.

j / r (Pause/Play): Press to pausethe CD. This button will then changeto the play button. Press the playbutton to play the CD.

Random:

1. Press to hear the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential,order.

2. Press Random again to turn offrandom play.

r (Rewind):

1. Press and hold to rewind quicklythrough a track selection. Youwill hear sound at a reducedvolume.

2. Release to stop rewinding.The display will show theelapsed time of the track.

[ (Forward):

1. Press and hold to fast forwardquickly through a track selection.You will hear sound at a reducedvolume.

2. Release to stop fast forwarding.The display shows the elapsedtime of the track.



q r (Folder/Artist/Album):

1. Select the left or right arrow togo to the previous or next folder,artist, or album on the disc.

2. Press the middle screen button,with the folder, artist, or albumname, to sort the MP3 by folder,artist, or album. It may take afew minutes for the system tosort the MP3.

y © ¨ z (Seek):

1. To seek tracks, press the uparrow to go to the next track.

2. Press the down arrow to go tothe start of the current track,if more than eight seconds haveplayed.

3. If either arrow is pressed morethan once, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the CD. The soundmutes while seeking.

w (Tuning Knob):

1. Turn counterclockwise one notchto go to the start of the currenttrack, turn it again to go to theprevious track.

2. Turn this knob clockwise to go tothe next track.

When playing an MP3 the rear seatoperator can power on the RSEvideo screen and use the remotecontrol to navigate through the MP3.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

The navigation system has anauxiliary input jack located onthe right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do notplug the headphone set into thefront auxiliary input jack. An externalaudio device such as an iPod,laptop computer, MP3 player, CDplayer, or cassette tape player, etc.can be connected to the auxiliaryinput jack for use as another audiosource.

Drivers are encouraged to setup any auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2 for moreinformation on driver distraction.



To use a portable audio player,connect a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, pressthe AUDIO control button, thenpress it again until AUX is selectedor press the AUX screen button tobegin playing audio from the deviceover the vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

The vehicle may have a rearentertainment system (RSE) witha second and third row screen.The RSE has audio adapters toallow you to connect auxiliarydevices. The audio can be heardthrough the speakers or throughthe wireless or wired headphones.See the Rear Seat Infotainmentuser guide for more information.

Drivers are encouraged toset up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park).See Defensive Driving on page 9‑2for more information on driverdistraction.

To switch the RSE system to use anauxiliary device:

1. Connect the auxiliary device tothe RSE system, for the secondor third row.

2. Press AUDIO then pressAUDIO again, repeatedly untilAUX (auxiliary) is selected orpress the AUX screen button.An auxiliary device must beconnected for the AUX screenbutton to appear as an option toselect.

3. For the second row displayselect the Rear AUXscreen button next to RearDisplay 1 and for the third rowdisplay select the Rear AUXscreen button next to RearDisplay 2. Each screen worksindependently of the other.The second row screen canwatch a DVD while the thirdrow screen can use theauxiliary device.

The rear seat passengers can alsouse the remote control to changethe functions of the RSE. See theRear Seat Infotainment user guidefor more information.



Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System (Overhead)The vehicle may havean Overhead DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio.The RSE system includes a radiowith a DVD player, a video displayscreen, and if the vehicle has a thirdrow seat, it could have a secondvideo display screen, audio/videojacks, two wireless headphones,and a remote control. See CD/DVDPlayer on page 7‑19 for moreinformation on the vehicle's DVDsystem.

Before Driving

The RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE system mightnot work until the temperatureis within the operating range.The operating range for the RSEsystem is above −20°C (−4°F)or below 60°C (140°F). If thetemperature of the vehicle isoutside this range, heat or coolthe vehicle until the temperatureis within the operating range ofthe RSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may have aParental Control feature, dependingon which radio the vehicle has.To start Parental Control, press and

hold the radio power button for morethan two seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA),DVD, and/or CD. While ParentalControl is on, a padlock icondisplays.

The radio can be turned back onwith a single press of the powerbutton, but the RSE system willremain under Parental Control.

To turn Parental Control off, pressand hold the radio power button formore than two seconds. The RSEreturns from where it was previouslyleft and the padlock icon disappearsfrom the radio display.

Parental Control can also be turnedoff by inserting or ejecting any disc,pressing the play icon on the radioDVD display menu, or changing anignition position.



Headphones

A. Battery cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 switch

C. Power button

D. Volume control

E. Power indicator light

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,

while Channel 2 is dedicated toRear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.These headphones can be usedto listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs,MP3s, DVD‐As, or any auxiliarysource connected to A/V jacks orthe auxiliary input jack, if the vehiclehas this feature. The wirelessheadphones have an On/Off button,channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volumecontrol.

If the vehicle has a third row videoscreen display, it has two additionalheadphones.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator lightlocated on the headphones comeson. If the light comes on, but thereis intermittent sound and/or staticon the headphones, or if theindicator light does not come on, thebatteries might need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section for more information.Switch the headphones to Offwhen not in use.

Infrared transmitters are located atthe rear of the overhead console.The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off, or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmittersfor more than three minutes. If youmove too far forward or step out ofthe vehicle, the headphones losethe audio signal.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volumecontrol located on the right side.

For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception.The symbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positionedon the right ear.



Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damagethe headphones and repairs willnot be covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slidethe battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audioor video signals to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such asa camcorder or a video gameunit to the RSE system. Adapterconnectors or cables (not included)may be required to connect theauxiliary device to the A/V jacks.Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.



The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input.The white jack (B) is for the leftaudio input. The red jack (C) isfor the right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The audio of theconnected source can be listened toover the speakers by sourcing theradio to the auxiliary device or bysourcing the RSA to the Rear Aux

and listening with the wirelessheadphones on Channel 2 or withthe wired headphones. See “Usingthe Auxiliary Input Jack” underAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑31 formore information about changingthe source.

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language can bechanged from the on screen setupmenu. To change any feature:

1. Press the z (display menu)button on the remote control.

2. Use the remote control n,q,p,o (navigation) arrows andther (enter) button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press the z button again toremove the setup menu from thescreen.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following possiblesources:. Wireless headphones. Vehicle speakers. Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks

on the RSA system, if thevehicle has this feature.

The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑58 formore information.



When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliaryinput jack if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.

Video Screen(s)

The video screen(s) are located inthe overhead console.

To use the video screen(s):

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

When the video screen is not inuse, push it up into its lockedposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on. This is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.Use the remote control power buttonor eject the disc to turn off thescreen.

The overhead console containsthe infrared transmitters for thewireless headphones and theinfrared receivers for the remotecontrol. They are located at therear of the console.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section formore information.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at the rearof the RSE overhead console andpress the desired button. Directsunlight or very bright light couldaffect the ability of the RSEtransmitter to receive signalsfrom the remote control. If theremote control does not seemto be working, the batteries mightneed to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.



Objects blocking the line of sightcould also affect the function of theremote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O (power)button can be used to turn on thevideo screen display and start thedisc. The radio can also turn on thevideo screen display. See CD/DVDPlayer on page 7‑19 for moreinformation.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

If the remote control becomeslost or damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses acode set of Toshiba®.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button toturn the video screen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this buttonto turn the remote control backlighton. The backlight automaticallytimes out after 7 to 10 seconds ifno other button is pressed whilethe backlight is on.

v (Title): Press this button toreturn the DVD to the main menu ofthe DVD. This function could varyfor each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press this buttonto access the DVD menu. The DVDmenu is different on every DVD.Use the navigation arrows to movethe cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press theenter button. This button onlyoperates when using a DVD.

n,q , p ,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button toselect the choice that is highlightedin any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press thisbutton to adjust the brightness,screen display mode (normal,full, or zoom), and display thelanguage menu.

q (Return): Press this buttonto exit the current active menuand return to the previous menu.This button operates only when thedisplay menu or a DVD menu isactive.

c (Stop): Press this button to stopplaying, fast reversing, or fastforwarding a DVD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press thisbutton to start playing a DVD. Pressthis button while a DVD is playing topause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.



While the DVD is playing, the DVDcan be played slowly by pressingthe play/pause button then pressingthe fast forward button. The DVDcontinues playing in a slow playmode. Also, reverse can be playedslowly by pressing the play/pausebutton and then pressing the fastreverse button. To cancel slow playmode, press the play/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press this button to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.Press this button again to go tothe previous track or chapter.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressthis button to go to the beginningof the next chapter or track. Thisbutton might not work while theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press thisbutton to quickly reverse the DVDor CD. To stop fast reversing a DVDvideo, press the play/pause button.To stop fast reversing a DVD audioor CD, release the fast reversebutton. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press thisbutton to fast forward the DVD orCD. To stop fast forwarding a DVDvideo, press the play/pause button.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release the fast forwardbutton. This button might not workwhile the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press this button tochange audio tracks on DVDs thathave this feature when the DVD isplaying. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button toturn on or off subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing. The format andcontent of this function vary foreach disc.



AUX (Auxiliary): Press this buttonto switch the system between theDVD player and an auxiliary source.

If the vehicle has a third row videoscreen, the AUX button controls thesource display on the second rowvideo screen, and the third rowvideo screen as described in thetable below:

AuxButtonPress

SecondRow

Screen

Third RowScreen

DefaultState (NoPress)

DVDMedia

DVDMedia

FirstPress

Aux VideoSource

Aux VideoSource

SecondPress

DVDMedia

Aux VideoSource

ThirdPress

Aux VideoSource

DVDMedia

FourthPress

Return toDefaultState

Return toDefaultState

d (Camera): Press this button tochange camera angles on DVDsthat have this feature while a DVDis playing. The format and contentof this function vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press this buttonwithin three seconds after enteringa numeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressthis button to select chapter or tracknumbers greater than nine. Pressthis button before entering thenumber.

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide the rear cover back on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure theyare installed correctly using thediagram on the inside of theremote control.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

There is no power. The ignition might not be turned toON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen.There are black borders on the topand bottom or on both sides, or thepicture looks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings inthe setup menu by pressing thedisplay menu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, the picture movesor scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is noobstruction between the remotecontrol and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make surethey are not dead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player, andpushing Play, sometimes theDVD starts where it left off andsometimes at the beginning.

If the stop button was pressed onetime, the DVD player resumesplaying where the DVD wasstopped. If the stop button waspressed two times, the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning ofthe DVD.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)


The auxiliary source is running, butthere is no picture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screenis in the auxiliary source mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

Sometimes the wireless headphoneaudio cuts out or buzzes.

Check for obstructions, lowbatteries, reception range,and interference from cellulartelephone towers, or use acellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones areon correctly using the L (left) andR (right) on the headphones.

The remote and/or the headphonesare lost.

See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen issourced to the DVD player.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on the radio that is in thevehicle. The video screen candisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whenZ or DVD AUX is pressed on theradio.



DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile faxmachines, or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsole

When cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video Screen

When cleaning the video screen,use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System(Headrest DVD)Vehicles with an RSE systeminclude two head restraint videodisplay screens with integratedDVD players, auxiliary inputs,two wireless headphones, and aremote control. This system worksindependently from the vehicle'sOverhead DVD RSE system.See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System (Overhead) on page 7‑33or Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System (Headrest DVD) onpage 7‑43 for information aboutthe Overhead DVD RSE system.

The vehicle has a feature calledRetained Accessory Power (RAP).With RAP, the RSE system can beplayed even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

Video Display Screens

The video display screens arelocated on the backside of eachhead restraint.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage canoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreens” later in this section formore information.



Using the RSE System

DVD Player: The loading slot forthe DVD player is located at thetop of the head restraint. Insert thedisc partially into the loading slotwith the printed side facing the rearof the vehicle. The DVD playerautomatically draws the disc in,“Loading” displays on the screenalong with a disc indicator, andplayback starts. If the disc isinserted incorrectly, the DVDplayer ejects the disc and NoDisc displays.

Some DVDs do not allow fastforwarding or skipping of thecopyright information or previews.If the DVD does not begin playing atthe main title, refer to the on-screeninstructions.

The DVD player can be controlledby using the buttons located belowthe video display screen or by usingthe buttons on the system’s remotecontrol. See “Remote Control” laterfor more information.

The following discs are compatiblewith the DVD player:. DVD-Video: A DVD that has

video.. CD-DA: A CD that has music or

sound content only.. CD-Video: A CD that has a

movie.. CD-R/RW: A disc that has

audio files such as CD-R withdownloaded MP3 files, MPEG,or JPEG files.

The DVD player and discs arecoded by global region. The DVDplayers are set to Region 1. Discswith other region codes will not workin the players.

If an error message displays on thevideo screen, see “DVD Messages”later in this section.

While the vehicle is moving,passengers should not unfastentheir safety belts to makeadjustments to the video screencontrol buttons. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑22. Use the remote controlfor any necessary adjustments.See “Remote Control” later in thissection.

POWER O : Press to turnthe power on or off. Each videoscreen can be powered on or offindependently.



EJECTX : Press to eject a discfrom the DVD slot.

If a disc is ejected from the player,but not removed, it will automaticallyreload into the player. Another wayto reload a disc that has beenejected, but not removed from theDVD player, is to press the ejectbutton or the play button.

PLAY r : Press this button locatedbelow the video display screen tostart playback of a disc. On DVDsand video CDs with playbackcontrol (PBC), menu screens candisplay automatically. It might benecessary to press the play buttonagain to begin play.

There is a play position memoryfeature for DVD and video CD only.If the DVD player is turned off andthen turned back on, the DVDplayer resumes playback wherethe disc stopped. The play positionmemory is erased if the disc isremoved.

STOP c : Press once to stopplaying a DVD.

There is a pre-stop feature for DVDand video CD only. This featureresumes playback of the discwhere it was stopped. Press thestop button once during discplayback and c displays on theDVD startup screen. This icondisappears after a few seconds.Press the stop button a secondtime, or eject the disc, to cancelthe pre-stop feature and to clearthe disc position memory.

SOURCE: Press to select betweenMonitor 3, Monitor 4, or theAV INPUT.

Each video display screen can beadjusted independently, as well asdisplay information from both DVDplayers and both A/V inputs.

Infrared Remote Sensor: Locatedin the top center of the video displayscreen. Do not block the signal fromthe remote to the sensor.

Infrared Transmitters: Located inthe top center of the video displayscreen. Do not block the signal fromthe headphones to the transmitter.

Video Display Screen: Located onthe back of each headrest.

AV OUTPUT (Audio/Video OutputJack): Located on the lower leftside of the screen and is identifiedon the video screen panel as theAV OUTPUT.

Headphone Jack: Wiredheadphones can be plugged intothe headphone jack with one-eighthinch stereo plugs.



AV INPUT: (Audio/Video InputJack): The audio/video input jackis located below the video displayscreen and allows viewing ofauxiliary sources such as portableDVD players, game stations,or video cameras, on each screen.. Video Input — The yellow

connector is used for videoinput.

. L Audio — The white connectoris used for the left side audio.

. R Audio — The red connector isused for the right side audio.

Level Lock and Release Latch:The viewing angle of the videoscreen can be adjusted by releasingthe latch and gently moving thescreen. Then lock it into a secureposition.

Vehicle Speakers

Audio from the DVD player or anauxiliary device can be heardthrough the vehicle speakers orthe wireless/wired headphones,while the radio is tuned to oneof the six frequencies selectedon the Sound Around portion ofthe system’s remote control.See “Remote Control” later inthis section.

Only one audio source can be heardthrough the vehicle’s speakers at atime. The audio source being usedis specified by the A/V (audio/video)source selected on the driver sidehead restraint video display screen.

To turn the RSE system audiooutput to the vehicle’s speakers,press Sound Around ON, on thesystem’s remote control. The audiofrom the RSE system can beheard through the wireless/wiredheadphones and the vehicle’sspeakers at the same time.

The volume on the radio can varywhen switching between the radio,CD, DVD, MP3, or an auxiliarydevice.

Wireless Headphones

The two wireless headphonesincluded with the Headrest DVDRSE system will only work withthe Headrest DVD RSE systemand are marked for channel 3 and 4.The wireless headphones must beused within a line of sight of thetransmitter that is located abovethe video display screen.

3‐4 Channel Selector: This islocated on the right earpiece. EitherChannel 3 or 4 can be selected withthe channel selector. The driver sidemonitor is designated as Channel 3,and the passenger side asChannel 4. Set the channel selectorswitch according to the videodisplay screen being viewed.



The message, “To listen to thismonitor tune your headphonesto Channel 3 (or 4)” displays forfive seconds then disappearswhen the video display screen isturned on.

OFF/ON (Power): Turn the powerswitch located on the earpiece toturn the wireless headphones onor off. Each headphone has a lightto indicate ON. If the light doesnot come on, the batteries mayneed to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System(Overhead) on page 7‑33 or RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) System(Headrest DVD) on page 7‑43 formore information.

The headphones shut offautomatically if the RSE system isturned off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitter formore than three minutes.

VOL0 (Volume): Use to adjustthe volume on the headphones.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damagethe headphones and repairs willnot be covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim atthe remote sensor located on topcenter of the video display screenand press the desired button.

Objects blocking the line-of-sightcan affect the function of the remotecontrol. Direct or very bright light

can affect the ability of thetransmitter to receive signalsfrom the remote control. If theremote control does not seem tobe working, the batteries mightneed to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” following this section.

The remote control provided withthe Headrest DVD RSE system, isnot a universal remote control andwill not control other equipment.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.



Remote Control Buttons

POWER: Press to turn theHeadrest DVD RSE system onand off.

SOURCE: Press to select betweenMonitor 3, Monitor 4, or AV INPUT.Any video equipment connectedto the AV inputs automaticallyoverrides the source selection.

SETUP: Press to change thedefault settings, see “Using the RSEOn-Screen Display (OSD) Menus”later in this manual. There are fourmain menu screens, each screendisplays a menu to select differentsetting options. The screens are:

1. General Setup — adjusts screensettings.

2. Audio Setup — sets thelanguage.

3. Preference Screen — sets thesubtitles and parental controls.

4. Password Setup — allows apassword to be set.

Press SETUP again to exit.

EJECTX : Press to eject orreload a disc.

DVD-Video Screen 3: Press theDVD button located under 3 totransmit IR codes for DVD modeon Video Screen 3.

TV-Video Screen 3: This button isnot used with the system.

DVD-Video Screen 4: Press theDVD button located under 4 totransmit IR codes for DVD modeon Video Screen 4.

TV-Video Screen 4: This button isnot used with the system.

SOUND AROUND ON/OFF: Pressto turn the FM Transmitter power onor off.

MUTE > (For DVD Only): Press toturn off the headphone sound. Pressagain to turn the sound on again.

PIX (Picture Selection): Press toadjust the picture’s On ScreenDisplay (OSD). Each time thisbutton is pressed, the pictureadjustment OSD, cyclesthrough bars for BRIGHTNESS,CONTRAST, COLOR, and TINT.Use the right/left navigation arrowsto adjust the setting. This featureautomatically shuts off id anotherbutton is pressed or adjustmentsare not made within six seconds.



SOUND AROUND SELECT: Pressto select an FM transmitter channel.The SOUND AROUND SELECTlets the DVD audio play over thevehicle’s sound system by tuningthe radio to one of the six FMfrequencies listed below.. CH1 : 88.3MHz. CH2 : 88.7MHz. CH3 : 89.1MHz. CH4 : 89.5MHz. CH5 : 89.9MHz. CH6 : 90.3MHz

MENU: Press to enter the DVDdisc menu while the disc is playing.

Q,R , q , r (NavigationArrows): Press to navigate throughmenus.

ENTER: Press to enter a selectedfunction or to begin playback ofthe disc.

REPEAT7 : Press to repeat partor all of a chapter, title, track, orthe entire disc after using the A‐Bbutton to setup repeat presetsections.

RETURN 8 : This button is notused with the system.

A‐B: This button is used to setuprepeat preset sections. Press thisbutton once while the disc is playingto select the starting position. Pressa second time to select the endposition. Press a third time to turnthe function off. To view the presetsection, press7.

AUTO MEMORY: This button is notused with the system.

SEARCH/SKIP: This button is notused with the system.

ERASE/ADD: This button is notused with the system.

R-S: This button is not used withthe system.

TITLE: Press to enter the disctitle mode. The title feature isdisc-specific, and may not beavailable on all discs.

SUBTITLE: Press to changethe subtitle language to anotheravailable language or to turnsubtitles off.

ANGLE: Press to select a differentviewing angle for discs that arerecorded with different cameraangles.

AUDIO: Press to select a differentlanguage for discs that are recordedwith different languages.

0‐9 (Numbers): The numberslocated on the lower left side of theremote control can be used to enternumbered menu options, channels,or track numbers.

GOTO: Press to enter the GOTOmenu to choose a desired title,chapter, track, or song insidethe disc.



DISPLAY: Press to scroll throughdisplay information on the upper leftcorner of the screen, such as title,chapter/track, time elapsed, andtime remaining, or to turn off thedisplay

PROGRAM: Press to edit aplayback program containingdesired titles in the DVD or tracksin the CD-DA.

3D: Press to change betweendifferent 3D audio modes for DVDor CD.

The options for DVD are: Off, Rock,Pop, Live, Dance, Techno, Classic,and Soft.

The options for CD are: Off,Concert, Living room, Hall,Bathroom Cave, Arena, and Church.

RANDOM: Press to play titlesrandomly.

PLAY/PAUSE r / j : Press to startplayback of the disc, or to pauseplayback.

STOP c : Press to stop playbackof a disc.. To resume disc playback,

press PLAY.. To start playback from the

beginning of the disc, pressSTOP, STOP, then PLAY .

ZOOM: Press to either enlarge theviewed image by 2X, 3X, and 4X,or reduce the image by 1/2X, 1/3X,and 1/4X.

PBC (Playback Control): Press toturn video CD playback control onor off.

FRr (Fast Reverse): Press tofast reverse the disc. Press multipletimes to choose between 2X, 4X,8X, 16X, and 32X speeds.

FF[ (Fast Forward): Press tofast forward the disc. Press multipletimes to choose between 2X, 4X,8X, 16X, and 32X speeds.

PREVg (Previous): Press toplay the previous chapter or track.To return to previous chapters ortracks one at a time, press andrelease multiple times until thedesired chapter or track is reached.

NEXTl : Press to play the nextchapter or track. To go to the nextchapter or track one at a time, pressand release multiple times until thedesired chapter or track is reached.



Battery Replacement

To change batteries in the remotecontrol:

1. Turn the remote controlface down.

2. Press down on the ridged areaof the battery cover and slideit off.

3. Install two AAA batteries into thebattery compartment.

4. Slide the cover back on until itclicks.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep it in a cool, dryplace.

Using the RSE On-ScreenDisplay (OSD) Menus

Use the OSD setup displaymenus for:. Initial setup. Display setup. Parental control setup. Adjusting the picture quality. Setting the various outputs. On‐screen display language

To use the OSD menus while usingthe DVD player or an auxiliarydevice:

1. Press the SETUP button on theremote control to display theicons and pages on the displayscreen.

2. Select the desired page by usingthe left/right navigation arrows tomove the cursor.

3. Press the SETUP button againon the remote control to canceluse of the setup display.

Not all DVDs support all of thefeature defaults in the setup menus.If a feature is not supported, thedefaults are provided by the DVDmedia.

To set the language for the OSD:

1. Press the SETUP button on theremote control.

2. Use the left/right navigationarrows to navigate the GeneralSetup Page, then use the downnavigation arrow to select theOSD language.

3. Press the right navigation arrowand then use the up/downnavigation arrows to selectEnglish, French, or Spanish.



To set the TV display:


2. Use the left/right navigationarrows to navigate the GeneralSetup Page.

3. Press the down navigation arrowto select TV Display sub-menuand to adjust the screen setting.

4. Press the right navigation arrowand then use the up/downnavigation arrows to select adisplay option.

The display options are:. Normal/PS (Pan and Scan):

This displays the widepicture on the screen witha portion of the left andright sides removed.

. Normal/LB (Letter-Box):This displays the widepicture with black bandson the upper and lowerportions of the screen.

. Wide (16:9): This option ischosen if the video screenpanel is wide screen.

5. Press ENTER on the remotecontrol to confirm the screen.

To reset all options to factorydefaults:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on theremote control to select theDefault sub-menu under thePreference Page.

3. Press the right navigation arrow,then press ENTER to reset.

This function will not affect theparental setting.



Settings for Parental Control

Use the SETUP MENU to accessthe parental control feature. It allowsfor control of the type of movierating content (from G to Adult)that can be viewed and is onlyaccessible when no disc is loaded.

To setup the Parental Control:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on theremote control to select theParental sub-menu under thePreference Page.

3. Press the SETUP button,and use the right and up/downnavigation arrows to select anyone of the available Ratingsettings from the display menu.

The Rating settings are:. Kid SAF. G. PG 13. PG R. R. NC 17. ADULT

4. Press the ENTER button toconfirm the selection.

If a disc is inserted into the DVDcompartment slot and it exceedsthe Parental Setting, the followingmessage appears on display:

The Parental Setting of this playerprohibits play. Would you like toallow this disc to play?

If yes if selected, the six digitpassword must be entered for thedisc to play. If the wrong passwordis entered, the following messageappears:

This movie will not play due to theParental Setting of the player.



To create a six digit password, usethe numeric keypad on the remotecontrol. Press the ENTER button toconfirm. The default password is136900.

To change the Parental ControlPassword:

1. Press the SETUP button on theremote control

2. Navigate to the Passwordsub-menu under the PasswordSetup Page.

3. Press the right navigation arrow,then press ENTER.

4. At the Old Password option,enter the old password or thedefault password (136900).

5. At the New Password option,enter the new password(six digits) using numericbuttons.

6. At the Confirm PWD option,confirm the new password byentering the new passwordagain.

7. Scroll to the OK button andpress ENTER. The message“Your password has beenchanged” displays.

Playing Audio CD

When an audio CD is playing, thedisplay shows the current track andthe amount of time that track hasbeen playing, the total amount oftime on the disc, and the currenttime running on the disc.



DISPLAY: Press to choose fromthe following display options:

1. Press DISPLAY once and SingleElapsed appears along with thecurrent track playing and thelength of time for that track.

2. Press DISPLAY twice and SingleRemain appears along with thecurrent track playing and theamount of time left on the track.

3. Press DISPLAY three times andTotal Elapsed appears alongwith the current track playingand the total time that hasplayed on the CD.

4. Press DISPLAY four times andTotal Remain appears along withthe current track playing and theamount of time left on the CD.

REPEAT: Press to toggle betweenTrack and All. The default for repeatis OFF.. Track repeats the track that is

playing.. All repeats the disc that is

playing.

Playing MP3 CD

MP3 is the format for storing digitalaudio. An audio CD quality songcan be compressed into the MP3format with very little loss of quality,while taking up much less space.CD-R/RW discs that have beenencoded in MP3 format can beplayed on the DVD player. See MP3on page 7‑28 for more information.

Selecting Folders and Songs

When an MP3 disc is inserted inthe player, the navigation screenappears. The folders and songs canbe changed by navigating throughthe file system. The DVD playerplays the songs in the order theywere burned to the disc.



1. Press STOP if a disc is playing.Press the up or down navigationarrows on the remote control togo through the folder list on theleft side of the screen.

2. Press ENTER when the desiredfolder is highlighted.

3. Press the up or down navigationarrows to go through the songlist and highlight the desiredsong. Press ENTER to begin theplayback of the selected song.

Skipping a Song

NEXT: Press to go to thenext song.

PREV (Previous): Press to returnto the beginning of the song that iscurrently playing. Press PREV twiceto go to the previous song.

Selecting a Play Mode

The order the songs are played canbe temporarily chosen on a disc.The FOLDER play mode is thedefault. Press the REPEAT buttonto access the play mode options.

The play mode options are:. Single — Play a selected song.. Folder — Play the folder in the

order the songs were recorded.. Shuffle — Play the songs in

random order, from within theselected folder.

Using the REPEAT Feature

REPEAT: Press to change betweenRepeat One and Repeat Folder.. Repeat One — Repeats the

song that is playing.. Repeat Folder — Repeats the

folder that is playing.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart


IR Sensor Inoperative . Check that the batteries are good in theremote control.

. Check that the remote Control IR Sensor isnot blocked.

. Aim the remote control toward the IR Sensorbeing controlled.

. Select the correct screen, 3 or 4.

No picture . Check that the correct video input mode isselected.

. Check that the video cable is plugged intothe jack securely.

No Sound . Check that the correct audio input mode isselected.

. Check that the audio cable is securelyplugged into the jack.

Cleaning the Video Screens

The video display screens aremade of a specially coated glassand can be scratched or damagedby abrasive products, solvents,or ammonia-based windowcleaners. Clean with a soft,lint-free, cotton cloth that hasbeen slightly dampened with warmwater. Dry the screens by wipingwith a clean dry cotton cloth.

Cleaning the Components

Use care when touching or cleaningthe components such as the DVDplayer or the discs.

Do not use DVD lens cleaners forDVD players because the lensof the DVD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.



Handle CDs and DVDs carefully.Store them in their original casesor other protective cases andaway from direct sunlight and dust.The DVD player scans the bottomsurface of the disc. If the surface ofa CD or DVD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, theCD or DVD may not play properly ornot at all. If the surface of a CD orDVD is soiled, take a soft, lint freecloth or dampen a clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it. Makesure the wiping process starts fromthe center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of aCD or DVD while handling it; thiscould damage the surface. Pick upCDs or DVDs by grasping the outeredges or the edge of the hole andthe outer edge.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemVehicles with this feature allowthe rear seat passengers to listento and control any of the musicsources: radio, CD, DVD, or otherauxiliary sources. The rear seatpassengers can control the samemusic sources the front seatpassengers are listening to (dualcontrol) or a different source.For example, rear seat passengerscan listen to and control a CDthrough the headphones, whilethe driver listens to the radiothrough the speakers. The rearseat passengers have control of thevolume for each set of headphones.

The radio functionality is controlledby both the RSA and the front radio,only one band can be tuned to atone time. Changing the band on theRSA or the front radio will changeband on the other system.

RSA functions can be operatedeven when the main radio is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

The audio system allows the rearspeakers to continue playing evenwhen the RSA audio is activethrough the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the auxiliary input(if available), located below theRSA. Turn the iPod on, then choosethe auxiliary input with the RSASRCE button. An iPod® or portableaudio device can be connectedto the front auxiliary jack or theUSB port.



P (Power): Press theP button toturn RSA on and off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increaseor to decrease the volume of thewired headphones. The left knobcontrols the left headphones andthe right knob controls the rightheadphones.

SRCE (Source): Press thisbutton to switch between the radio(AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, USB, auxiliaryjack, and rear auxiliary.

© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM,AM, or XM (if equipped), presseither the left © or right ¨ seekarrow to go to the previous or to thenext station or channels and staythere. This function is inactive, with

some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

Press and hold either the left © or

right ¨ seek arrow until the displayflashes, to tune to an individualstation. The display stops flashingafter the buttons have not beenpushed for more than two seconds.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

While listening to a disc, press theright ¨ seek arrow to go to the nexttrack or chapter on the disc. Pressthe left © seek arrow to go back tothe start of the current track orchapter (if more than ten secondshave played). This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press either the left © or

right ¨ seek arrow to perform a

cursor up or down on the menu.Hold the left © or right ¨ seek arrowto perform a cursor left or right onthe menu.

When a USB device is playing, theright or left seek button can be usedto control the device.

PROG (Program): Press thisbutton to go to the next preset radiostation or channel set on the mainradio. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press this button to go tothe beginning of the CD or DVDaudio. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press the PROG buttonto perform the menu function, enter.



Navigation

Using the NavigationSystemThis section presents basicinformation needed to operate thenavigation system.

Use the control buttons located onthe navigation system along with theavailable touch-sensitive screenbuttons on the navigation screen tooperate the system. See Overviewon page 7‑3 for more information.

Once the vehicle is moving, variousfunctions are disabled to reducedriver distractions.

Control Buttons

The following control buttons arelocated on the navigation system:

O /n (Power/Volume):

1. Press to turn the system onand off.

2. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume to the audio system.

3. Press and hold for more thantwo seconds to turn off thenavigation system, the RearSeat Entertainment (RSE), andRear Seat Audio (RSA). If thevehicle has not been tuned off,the RSE and the RSA can beturned back on by pressing thisknob and continues play of thelast active source.

Z (Eject): Press to eject theCD/DVD Disc. See CD/DVD Playeron page 7‑19.

w (Tune): Turn to go to the nextor previous frequency or disc trackor chapter. See CD/DVD Player onpage 7‑19 or MP3 on page 7‑28 formore information.

AUDIO: Press to display the audioscreen. Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM, if equipped, DISC,or AUX (Auxiliary), or press on thescreen button. See CD/DVD Playeron page 7‑19, MP3 on page 7‑28,and Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑31for more information.

FAV (Favorite): Press to accessthe preset stations. See “StoringRadio Station Presets” under,Overview on page 7‑3.

5 (Phone): See the OnStar(if equipped) owner guide andBluetooth (if equipped) for moreinformation.



e (Sound): Press to access theSound menu to adjust the treble,midrange, bass, fade, balance, andDigital Signal Processing (DSP).

yz (Scan Up/Down): Press toscan the tracks/chapters up or downon a disc.

y © ¨ z (Seek) Key (Previous/Next): Press the up or down arrowsto go to the next or previous station.Press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation.

NAV (Navigation): Press to viewthe vehicle's current position onthe map screen. Each press ofthis button cycles through FullMap and the tab that displays thecurrent audio source (AM, FM, XM(if equipped), CD, etc.). Full Mapdisplays the screen in full map view.

Selecting the audio tab splits thescreen between the map screenand the current audio sourcescreen menu.

RPT (Repeat): Press to repeat thelast voice guidance prompt.

DEST (Destination): Press toaccess the Destination Entryscreen. From this screen, you canselect from several options to plan aroute by entering destination points.

CONFIG (Configure): Press toadjust several of the system'sfeatures and preferences.

Touch-Sensitive ScreenButtons

Touch-sensitive screen buttonsare located on the screen. When ascreen button has been selected, abeep sounds. Screen buttons arehighlighted when a feature isavailable.

Alpha-Numeric Keyboard

Letters of the alphabet, symbols,punctuation, and numbers, whenavailable, displays on the navigationscreen as an alpha or numerickeyboard. The alpha keyboarddisplays when the system requiresentry of a city or street name.

All characters are touch-sensitivescreen buttons. Press a character toselect it.

A-Y (Accent Alphabet): Select toenter letters with accent symbols.This button may toggle to A-Z.

A-Z (Alphabet): Select to enterletters from the alphabet. Thisbutton may toggle to A-Y.

0-9 (Numbers): Select to enternumbers.



U (Space): Select to enter aspace between characters or thewords of a name.

Backspace: Select if an incorrectcharacter has been entered.

To make name entries easier,the system only highlights thecharacters that can follow the lastone entered. For example, if a Z isentered, a T may not be availablefor selection.

If a name does not display afterentry, it may need to be entereddifferently or the map DVD discmay not contain that information.See Maps on page 7‑62 for moreinformation.

MapsThis section includes basicinformation that you need toknow about the map database.

The maps are stored on a compactflash drive that is built into thenavigation system.

Detailed Areas

Road network attributes arecontained in the map database fordetailed areas. Attributes includeinformation such as street names,street address, turn restrictions,etc. A detailed area includes allmajor highways, service roads,and residential roads. The detailedareas include points of interest(POI) such as: restaurants, airports,banks, hospitals, police stations,gas stations, tourist attractions,historical monuments, etc. The mapdatabase may not include data fornewly constructed areas or mapdatabase corrections that arecompleted after the productionof the compact flash drive.The navigation system providesfull route guidance in the detailedmap areas.

Limited Guidance Areas

Any area that is not classified asdetailed, is a limited guidancearea. Limited guidance streets aredisplayed on the map but routeguidance may not be given on thesestreets. Some POI categories, suchas the city center POI category, andsome street addresses are includedin the limited guidance areas.

The navigation system informsthrough voice prompts when youare traveling into a limited guidancearea where route guidance is notavailable. The street maps and thedirectional arrow displayed on thenavigation system can then be usedto determine the remaining route toyour destination.

Map Adjustments

The system lets you adjust the scaleof view on the map. Also, as youdrive, the map scrolls automaticallybased on the direction of travel.



Map Scales

+ / − (Zoom In/Zoom Out): Touchthe zoom in or out screen buttonsor the scale on the bar to changethe level of map detail. The scaleappears on the screen once thezoom in or zoom out screen buttonsare selected. The system adjuststhe map accordingly. The scale of amap can range from 1/32 mi (50 m)to 256 mi (400 km). To changeEnglish or metric, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑26 for more information.

Scrolling the Map

Press anywhere on the map screenand the scroll symbol appears. Usethis feature to scroll across the map.

Move your finger in any directionon the map screen and the mapcontinues to scroll in that directionuntil you remove your finger fromthe screen.

If scrolling while the vehicle is inP (Park), the system scrolls initiallyat a slower rate. It increases if youcontinue pressing on the mapscreen.

If scrolling while the vehicle is inmotion, there is one scroll speedand a limited distance to scroll.Keep pressing on the map screento scroll for a longer distance.

If you have used the scroll feature toscroll the map and the vehicle icondisappears off the screen, press theNAV (Navigation) control button toreturn to the current vehicle locationon the map.

The scroll feature on the mapcan be used to set a destination.See “From Map” under Destinationon page 7‑69 for more information.

While scrolling on the map,press GO to calculate the routefrom the current position to thedestination mark.



Navigation SymbolsThe following symbols are the mostcommon symbols that appear on amap screen.

The vehicle is shown as thissymbol. It indicates the currentposition and the direction thevehicle is traveling on the map.

The destination symbol appearson the map, after a route hasbeen planned, marking the finaldestination.

The stopover symbol displays onthe map after a stopover has beenadded to the route.

The stopover symbols arenumbered one through three,depending on how many stopovershave been set.

The distance to destination symbolindicates the distance to the finaldestination.

This symbol appears when the timeto the destination is not available orwhile you are scrolling on the map.

The distance and time to destinationsymbol indicates the distance andthe estimated time remaining to thefinal destination, depending on theoption selected.



The straight line to distance symbolindicates the straight-line distanceto the destination.

This symbol appears before youstart driving on the route or if on aroad where navigation guidancecannot be given.

The north up symbol indicates themap with North Up, known as NorthUp mode.

While in North Up mode, the vehicleicon follows the north directionon the map regardless of whichdirection the vehicle is traveling.Select this screen symbol to switchbetween North Up, Heading Up,and 3–D view modes.

The heading up symbol indicatesthat the vehicle is traveling up onthe map and is known as HeadingUp mode.

The shaded triangle indicates theNorth direction. While in HeadingUp mode the direction at the topof the screen and the way thevehicle icon is heading indicatesthe direction the vehicle is traveling.Select this screen symbol to switchbetween Heading Up, North Up, and3–D view modes.

Three-dimensional (3–D) view modechanges the appearance of the mapdisplay to a road level view.

The No GPS symbol appears whenthe vehicle is acquiring or notreceiving a Global PositioningSystem (GPS) satellite signal.

See Global Positioning System(GPS) on page 7‑96 for moreinformation.



Select the Mark screen button tostore the location on the screen inthe address book.

The system automatically storesthe point in the address book.See “Adding Destinations to theAddress Book” under Destination onpage 7‑69 for more information.

Displaying Points of Interest (POI)on the Map Screen

Select the POI screen button todisplay or delete POI icons fromthe map.

Displaying POI icons on the mapshows where POIs (e.g. restaurants,gas stations, etc.) are located.This screen appears after selectingthe POI screen button.

1. Select one of the POI categoriesto display the POI icon at the topof the map screen. Select thePOI category again to delete thePOI icon.

2. Up to five categories can displayon the map screen.

3. Press the Show POI screenbutton to add more POI icons.

More: Select to view more POIcategories.



POI Close to:

1. Once a category has beenselected, touch this button todisplay the list of available POIsfor the selected POI category.The list provides the POI icon,the name, the direction, and thedistance to the POI from thevehicle's current position.

2. Use the scroll arrows to move upand down the list.

3. Use the sorting screen buttons:Dist (distance), Icon, Name, andon Route as needed.

Go: Select this screen button, nextto the desired POI, to make this POIa destination or a stopover.

Select a POI name to receiveinformation about the POI.From this screen you can select:Address Book, Go, Map, or Call(if Bluetooth® or OnStar personalcalling is activated).

Address Book: Press to add thisPOI to the address book. See “Nav”under Configure Menu on page 7‑83for information on editing addressbook entries.

Go: Select to make this POI adestination or a stopover.

Map: Select to display the mapshowing the location of the POI.

Call: Select to dial the phonenumber using your Bluetooth®

phone (if “paired” with the vehicle)or the OnStar HandsFree Callingsystem (if equipped). For moreinformation about Bluetooth calling,see Bluetooth on page 7‑102.For more information about OnStarHandsFree calling, see the OnStarOwner Guide.

OK: Select to display the mapscreen.

Show POI: Select to display orremove the POI icons from the mapscreen.

List all Categories: Select to listall POIs sorted alphabetically.

Delete: To delete a specific POIcategory, select the category.

Clear All: Select this screen buttonto clear all selected POI categories.



Driving on a Route

When driving on a routeddestination, the map screenautomatically displays the nextmaneuver.

The pop-up displays the nextmaneuver direction and the distancefrom it.

When approximately 400 m (1/4 mi)from the next maneuver, the screendisplays the name and a detailedview of it.

3–D Lane Guidance

Some major metropolitan areas mayinclude a 3–D lane guidance featurefor highway exits and junctions.This feature gives you an enhancedrepresentation of the exits andjunctions on the route.



Dual Mode

This dual screen symbol displayswhen the screen is in dual mode.

Dual mode displays the route onhalf of the screen and a maneuveror Interstate Exit list on the otherhalf. The Interstate Exit list advisesof approaching exits. Press thisscreen button to switch betweendual screen and full screen whichdisplays the entire route.

Auto Reroute

When a destination is set but isoff the planned route, the systemautomatically plans a new route andbegins to reroute. The new route ishighlighted on the screen.

DestinationPress the DEST control buttonto access the Destination Entryscreen. From this screen, you canselect from several options to plan aroute by entering destination points.

To enter a destination, choose fromone of the following destinationentry methods:

Address Entry

2 Address Entry: Enter either acity or street to use the addressentry destination method.

To enter a destination by inputtingthe city name first:


2. Select2.




4. Once a state or province hasbeen selected the City namecategory is automaticallyselected for entry.

Enter the City Name or press theLast 5 Cities screen button.

The Last 5 Cities screendisplays a list of the last five citynames that had been entered.Select a city from the list and itappears in the City name area.

If using the alpha keyboard,finish entering the city name.If five or less names areavailable, a list displays.If more than five are available,the List screen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available cities.Select this button to view thelist and select a city.

5. Once a city has been selectedthe Street name category isautomatically selected for entry.

Start entering the street name.If five or less names areavailable, a list displays.If more than five are available,the List screen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available streets.Select this button to view the list.

6. Once a street has beenselected, press House to enterthe house number. The systemdisplays the house numberrange that is available for thestreet.

7. Select GO. The map screen,with the destination markeddisplays.



See “Getting Started on YourRoute” in this section for moreinformation.

To enter a destination by enteringthe street name first:


2. Select2.




4. Select Street and start enteringthe street name or press theLast 5 Streets screen button.

If the street name is common,the city might need to be enteredfirst.

The Last 5 Streets screendisplays a list of the last fivestreet names that had beenentered. Select a street fromthe list and it appears in theStreet name area.

If using the alpha keyboard,finish entering the street name.If five or less names areavailable, a list displays.If more than five are available,the List screen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available streets.Select this button to view the listand select a street.

5. Once a street has beenselected, select House to enterthe house number. The systemdisplays the house numberrange that is available for thestreet.

6. Once the house number isselected, the city nameautomatically populates.If there is more than one cityavailable for selection, a list ofcities display. Select the city.





To enter a destination by entering across street:


2. Select2.


4. Select Street and start enteringthe street name or press theLast 5 Streets screen button.

If the street name is common,the city might need to be enteredfirst.

The Last 5 Streets screendisplays a list of the last fivestreet names that had beenentered. Select a street fromthe list and it appears in theStreet name area.



If using the alpha keyboard,finish entering the street name.If five or less names areavailable, a list displays.If more than five are available,the List screen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available streets.Select this button to view the listand select a street.

5. Once a street has beenselected, select Cross Streetand start entering the crossstreet name. If five or lessnames are available, a listdisplays. If more than fiveare available, the List screenbutton displays a number.This number represents thenumber of available streets.Select this button to view thelist and select a street.





Point of Interest (POI)

The Point of Interest (POI)destination entry method letsyou select a destination fromthe POI list.

i Point of Interest: Press toaccess the POI (Point of Interest)screen. From this screen you havetwo options to select/enter adestination. Enter the name usingthe alpha keyboard or select acategory from the category list.

To use the point of interestdestination entry method by enteringthe name:


2. Selecti.




4. Enter the POI name.

If five or less names areavailable, a list displays.If more than five are available,the List screen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available POIs.Select this button to view the list.

5. Select GO, located next to thePOI. The map screen, with thedestination marked displays.




To use the point of interestdestination entry method byselecting a category:


2. Selecti.

3. Select Browse POI Categories toview the list of POI categories.

4. Select a category.

The system displays availablePOI names in the selectedcategory.

5. Select GO, located next to thePOI. The map screen, with thedestination marked displays.




Address Book

The address book entry method letsyou select a destination by selectingan address that has been stored inthe address book.

g Address Book: Press toaccess the Address Book screen.From this screen an address thatalready exists can be selected asthe destination.



To use the address book entrymethod:


2. Selectg.

A list of the address bookaddresses display.

3. Select GO, located next to thedestination. The map screen,with the destination markeddisplays.




See “Adding Destinations to theAddress Book” in this section.

Previous Destination

The previous destination entrymethod lets you select a destinationfrom a list of previous destinationpoints.

/ Previous Destination: Press toaccess the Previous Destinationscreen. The system stores up to20 points that have been previouslyentered. As new destinations areentered, the system automaticallydeletes the oldest destinations andadds the new destinations.

To use the previous destinationentry method:


2. Select /.

3. Select a previous destinationfrom the list. Use the arrow tothe right of the destination toview the entire destination nameas necessary. Use the scrollarrows to the left to scrollthrough the list.

4. Select GO, located next to thedestination. The map screen,with the destination markeddisplays.






From Map

This destination entry method allowsyou to select a destination byscrolling on the map.

) From Map: Press to enter theFrom Map destination entry method.

To use this destination entrymethod:


2. Select ). A map screendisplays with the scrollingsymbol.

3. Use 0 / 1 and press on themap to find the area that youwould like to select as yourdestination.

Pressing/holding and draggingyour finger on the map activatesfast scrolling.

4. Press once on the area thatyou would like to set as yourdestination.

The map screen displays theaddress information.





Map Coordinates

The coordinates destination entrymethod lets you select a destinationby entering latitude and longitudecoordinates.

Map Coordinates: Press to accessthe Coordinates Entry screen.



To use the coordinates destinationentry method:


2. Select From Map.

3. Select Map Coordinates.

4. Select Latitude and select eitherN (north) or S (south) to enterthe direction of the latitudecoordinate. Enter the numericportion of the latitude coordinate.

5. Select Longitude and selecteither E (east) or W (west) nextto enter the direction of thelongitude coordinate. Enter thenumeric portion of the longitudecoordinate.

6. Once both coordinates areentered, select GO. The mapscreen, with the destinationmarked displays.




Preset Destination

The preset destination entrymethod lets you set a destination byselecting from one of five previouslystored destinations. Besides voicetagged destinations, these are theonly destinations available to setwhile the vehicle is moving. If adestination is not set for one ofthe screen buttons, the button isdimmed and not available for use.See “Adding or Changing PresetDestinations” in this section forinformation on how to add a presetdestination.

To use the preset destination entrymethod:


2. Select the desired presetdestination screen button.The screen buttons are labeledwith the name that was selectedfor the destination when it wasstored. The map screen, with thedestination marked displays.






Map Destination Screen Functions

If the map screen is used to showdestination, it will have map screencapabilities such as GO, Mark,Zoom, Scroll, etc. The address isshown at the top of the screen.

Destination Map Screen

OnStar® Destination Download(US and Canada)

OnStar Destination Download(if equipped) is a service availablefor OnStar subscribers that makesoperating your navigation systemmuch simpler. It allows subscribersto request and receive navigationassistance on-the-go.

Using OnStar® DestinationDownload (US and Canada)

Press the blue OnStar buttonand an Advisor can locate apoint-of-interest or an address anddownload the necessary informationor coordinates to your navigationsystem. Once the destination isdownloaded, the navigation systemwill search for the address in themapping disc's database. When theaddress is found, it will be shownon your navigation system's screenalong with the buttons describedbelow.



OnStar Download Screen. Select GO, the navigation

system calculates route(s).Select a route (i.e. ShortestRoute), and Start Guidance.

. Select Map, the navigationsystem displays the DestinationMap Screen.

. Select Call, the navigationsystem initiates a call to yourdestination with your Bluetoothphone (if available) or OnStarHands-Free Calling (if minutesare available).

. Select Add to Address Book,the navigation system copies thedownloaded destination to theaddress book and displays thenew address book entry.

. Select Back, the navigationsystem cancels your OnStarDestination Download andreturns to the previous screen.The downloaded address willnot be added to the previousdestinations

Route Guidance Not Active

If an OnStar destination isdownloaded while route guidanceis not active, the navigation systemdisplays an OnStar DestinationDownload Screen and operationswill continue as outlined in theUsing OnStar Destination Downloadsection:

Route Guidance Active

If OnStar downloads a destinationwhile route guidance is alreadyactive, the navigation system addsthe downloaded destination as thenext waypoint in the existing route.All features such as Call and Add toAddress Book will be available forthe waypoint. Refer to the sectionon Waypoints for more information.



Previous Destinations

Previous OnStar DestinationDownloads are saved underPrevious Destinations in thenavigation system where theycan be accessed or saved tothe address book.

Important Notes regarding OnStarDestination Download:. If the navigation system is

turned off when the destinationdownload is attempted,the navigation system willautomatically turn on anddisplay the OnStar DestinationDownload Screen. The radiowill remain on after thedownload occurs.

. If OnStar downloads adestination and the addressis not found in the mappingdisc’s database and routingby coordinates is not available,the Go and Map buttons grayout and routing will not beavailable. Press the blue OnStarbutton for further assistance.

. The Call button grays out whenthere is no phone numberavailable for your destinationand while connected to OnStar.

Map Destination Screen Functions

If the map screen is used to showdestination, it will have map screencapabilities such as GO, Mark,Zoom, Scroll, etc. The address isshown at the top of the screen.

Destination Map Screen



Getting Started on Your Route

Once a destination has beenentered, there are several functionsthat can be performed. Press DESTto access the Route screen.

Turn List

Turn List: Press to view the list ofturn maneuvers for the entire routeand to avoid turns on the route.

r /q (Scroll Arrows): Press thearrows to scroll through the list ofmaneuvers.

Avoid: Press this screen button,next to the adjacent street name, toavoid the maneuver.

The map screen displays. The routerecalculates without this maneuver.

Route Preview: Select to previewthe entire route in either direction.

t (Reverse Skip) : Select to goback to the start point or previousstopover.

q /r (Reverse Scroll): Select toscroll to the start point or previousstopover. The t (reverse skip)button changes to a fast reversescreen button.

j (Pause): Select to pause theroute preview, while in reverse orfast forward scroll.



r /[ (Fast Forward Scroll):Select to scroll to the nextstopover or to the final destination.Theu (fast forward skip) buttonchanges to a fast speed fastforward.

u (Fast Forward Skip): Select togo to the next stopover or to thefinal destination.

Detour

Detour: Select this screen buttonfrom the Route screen, then selectto detour 2 km, 5 km, 10 km (1 mile,3 miles, or 5 miles) around thecurrent route. This can also beselected to detour the whole routeif necessary. The detour option isonly available while driving on acurrent planned route.

Voice Volume

Select this screen button from theRoute screen to turn voice guidanceon or off and to change the volumeof voice prompts. See “Nav” underConfigure Menu on page 7‑83 formore information.

Add Stopover

Add Stopover: Select this screenbutton from the Route screen.This feature allows up to threestopovers to be added to the currentroute between the start point andfinal destination. Once a stopoverhas been added, the points can beedited or deleted.

To add a stopover:


2. Select the Add Stopover screenbutton. This button only appearsif a route has been calculated.

3. Using the desired method ofentering a destination, enterthe stopover. See “Destination”previously for more information.



6. To add the second and thirdstopovers, press the DESTcontrol button, then select theAdd screen button, where thenext waypoint should appearon the route.





To delete a stopover from thecurrent route:


2. Select Delete for the desiredstopover to delete.

3. The system displays a pop-upconfirmation message. PressYes to delete the stopover; pressNo to cancel this operation.



Suspend Guidance

Press this screen button, from theRoute screen, to put the currentroute on hold.

Resume Guidance

Press this screen button, from theRoute screen, to resume guidanceon the current route.

Cancel Guidance

Press this screen button, from theRoute screen, to cancel the currentroute.

Adding Destinations to theAddress Book

There are two ways to add adestination to the address book:. To add the current vehicle

position to the addressbook, press the Mark screenbutton from the map screen.The system automatically savesthe current vehicle informationin the address book. Whenscrolling on the map the Markscreen button automatically addsthe current scrolled positioninformation in the address book.

. Press the Add to AddressBook screen button whenavailable on POI informationscreens, Destination Entryscreens, or POI screens.The system automaticallysaves this information in theaddress book.

See “Nav” under Configure Menu onpage 7‑83 for information on editingaddress book entries.

Adding or Changing PresetDestinations

This feature allows additionsor changes one of five presetdestinations. When a destinationhas been added as a presetdestination, it is available to selectfrom the Destination Entry screen.See “Preset Destination” previouslyfor information on how to selecta preset destination as a finaldestination.



To store the current vehicle positionas a preset destination:

1. Select Mark from the mapscreen to add the current vehicleposition to the address book.The Address Book screenappears.

2. Select Name.An alpha-keyboard displays.Enter the name. Press OK thenBack to return to the addressbook information screen.

3. Press and hold one of thebuttons at the bottom of thescreen until the name appearsin that preset destination screenbutton. It is now available toselect from the Destination Entryscreen.

To store an address book entry as apreset destination:

1. Select the CONFIG controlbutton.

2. Select the Nav screen button orpress the CONFIG control buttonuntil Nav is selected or press theNav screen button.

3. Select Edit/View.

4. Select the address bookentry to be stored as the presetdestination. Select Name to adda name, if needed.

5. Press and hold one of thebuttons at the bottom of thescreen until the name appearsin that preset destination screenbutton. It is now available toselect from the Destination Entryscreen.

Configure Menu

Press the CONFIG (Configure)control button to adjust severalof the system's features andpreferences. The last selectedCONFIG screen is the screenthat displays: Sound, Radio, Nav(navigation), Display, or Time.



Sound

Press the CONFIG control buttonto enter the configure menuoptions, then press CONFIG again,repeatedly until Sound is selectedor press the Sound screen buttonto make speaker and DSP (DigitalSignal Processing) adjustments.See “Sound Menu” under, Using theNavigation System on page 7‑60for more information.

Radio

Press the CONFIG control buttonto enter the configure menuoptions, then press CONFIG again,repeatedly until Radio is selectedor press the Radio screen button tomake changes for radio informationdisplayed, preset pages, XM™(if equipped) categories, and Bose®

AudioPilot®. See “Radio Menu”under, Using the Navigation Systemon page 7‑60 for more information.

Nav (Navigation)

Press the CONFIG control buttonto enter the configure menuoptions, then press CONFIG again,repeatedly until Nav is selected orpress the Nav screen button.

Voice Prompt

Voice Prompt: Press the VoicePrompt screen button to change thevolume of the voice prompts or toturn voice guidance on and off.

Volume: Press + (plus) or − (minus)to increase or to decrease thevolume of the voice prompts.The system will respond withthe adjusted voice level.

Voice Guidance: Press On or Offto turn voice instructions on and offwhile traveling on a planned route.

Route Preference

Press the Route Preference screenbutton to change route optionswhen the system calculates a route.

Allow Major Roads: This featureallows the system to use majorroads when calculating a plannedroute.

Allow toll road: This feature allowsthe system to use toll roads whencalculating a planned route.

Allow ferry: This feature allowsthe system to use ferries whencalculating a planned route.



Allow time and seasonalrestricted road: This featureallows the system to use timerestricted and seasonal roads whencalculating a planned route.

Edit Address Book — How to Add

To add an address to the addressbook, see “Adding Destinationsto the Address Book” underDestination on page 7‑69.

Edit Address Book — Edit/View

To edit the name of anaddress book:


2. Select the Nav screen button.

3. Select Edit/View Address Book.

4. Select the Address book entry.

5. Press the Name screen buttonand use the alpha keyboard toedit or add the name.

6. Press OK to save your changes,then press Back to return tothe Address Book informationscreen.

To add or change the phone numberof an address book entry:




4. Select the address book entry tochange.

5. Press the Phone # screen buttonand use the numeric keyboardto input or change the phonenumber.

6. Press OK to save your changes,then press Back to return tothe Address Book informationscreen.

To change the map icon of anaddress book entry:




4. Select the address book entry tochange.

5. Select the Icon screen button.

6. Select an icon from the list.



To add a voice tag to an addressbook entry:




4. Select Add Voice Tag.

5. The system will ask for you tostate the name. You will havefour seconds to state the name.The system will respond backwith the name and promptyou to repeat the name forconfirmation.

To delete an address book entry:




4. Select the address book entry todelete.

5. Press Delete to delete theaddress book entry.

6. A confirmation pop-up willdisplay. Select OK to delete;select Cancel to cancel theoperation.

To delete the entire address book:




4. A list of all the address bookentries will display. Press andhold Clear All.

5. A confirmation pop-up willdisplay. Select OK to delete;select Cancel to cancel theoperation.

Map Database Information

Press the Map DatabaseInformation screen button toview the coverage areas of themap DVD.



Off-Road Mode

To turn the Off-road mode on or off:

1. Press the CONFIG controlbutton.

2. Press the Nav screen button.

3. Press Off-Road mode.The button will be highlightedwhen the feature is on.

When the off-road mode is turnedon, the navigation system will showthe path being traveled by thevehicle when not on a marked road.This path will be a simulation sincethe map database coverage willnot have these roads on the DVD.This path will be stored in thenavigation system's memory,see “Previous Destination” underDestination on page 7‑69 for moreinformation.

See Defensive Driving on page 9‑2for more information about off-roaddriving.

Traffic Options(US and Canada)

Read the following Optionsdescriptions to understand howthe XM NavTraffic™ operates.

XM NavTraffic™(USA and Canada)

Vehicles with the navigation systemhave an XM NavTraffic™ receiver.XM NavTraffic™ is a subscriptionservice provided via XM™ SatelliteRadio. XM NavTraffic™ providesreal-time traffic information fullyintegrated to the navigationsystem to display current trafficconditions for a driver’s chosenroute. XM NavTraffic™ allowsdrivers to make the most informed,timesaving routing decisions.

If the Traffic screen button ispressed or if an attempt is madeto turn on the traffic display in theNavigation Setup Menu without a

subscription, a Caution screendisplays indicating that XM traffic isnot activated.

Three types of traffic information formajor roadways are displayed onthe navigation system:. Unscheduled traffic incident

data, such as accidents anddisabled vehicles

. Scheduled traffic incident data,such as road construction androad closures

. Traffic flow information (rate ofspeed data)



Traffic information is deliveredto the vehicle by the XM™ Radiosatellites. XM NavTraffic™ makes itpossible for the navigation systemto provide continuously updatedtraffic information personalizedfor a driver’s needs.

XM NavTraffic™ currentlybroadcasts the traffic informationfor many markets nationally,and the service may be availablein more cities in the future. Visitwww.xmnavtraffic.com for moredetails on local coverage.

A service fee is required in orderto receive the XM NavTraffic™service.

Turning XM NavTraffic™ Onand Off

To turn traffic on or off:

1. Press the CONFIG controlbutton, then press CONFIGagain, repeatedly until Nav isselected or press the Navscreen button.

2. Press the Traffic Options button.

3. Press the Traffic button.This button is highlightedwhen it is active.

Selecting Alert for ApproachingTraffic Events enables thesystem to show a pop-up screenthat notifies of possible trafficissues ahead.

When this feature is highlighted,while traveling on a route,accidents located on the routeare indicated and can beavoided.

Traffic Icon

The Traffic Icon appears on theTraffic Tab, next to the wordTraffic, when traffic is found inthe local area.



The Traffic Icon has three different condition displays. These are:

Condition Traffic Status Icon

. No XM NavTraffic™subscription.

. No Traffic is found in thelocal area.

. The Traffic Feature is turned off.

Traffic events are in the area, butnone are on route.

Traffic events are on route.

Locations and Information ofTraffic Conditions

The system may take some timeto sort the information. The list oftraffic conditions display in the orderof distance from the vehicle, up toapproximately 125 km (75 mi). Witha route planned, the system defaultsto list traffic events on your route.Without a route planned, if travellingon a major interstate, the systemlists events immediately ahead onthe interstate first. Then all othertraffic events follow. Not all trafficconditions may be listed.



To view the traffic condition locationand information on the map:

1. Press the NAV control button,then press NAV again,repeatedly until Traffic isselected, or press the Trafficscreen button. A list of trafficconditions with distance fromthe vehicle's current positiondisplays.

An arrow may appear before thedistance. The arrow indicatesthe distance is a straight linedistance and it shows thedirection of the event fromthe current vehicle's position.If no arrow appears, the distanceindicates how far the event isahead on current Interstatehighway or route. While thevehicle is moving, the trafficlist up or down, scroll arrowsare limited to a maximum offour pages. No more thanfour pages of traffic eventsmay be viewed while thevehicle is moving.

2. Select a traffic condition to getmore detailed information of theevent.

Options

Select the Options screen button.A Traffic Options menu displays.Select the desired traffic relatedoption.

Traffic: Select to enable or disablethe traffic function.

Show Traffic ICONS: Select todisplay traffic icons on the mapscreen. This function allows whichtraffic information displays.



Traffic Flow Status — This screenbutton is used to enable or disablethe green, yellow, red and orangearrows shown beside the roadsand used to show the traffic flowor extent of a traffic event.. Black indicates a closed road

segment. Red indicates significantly

impaired traffic flow withaverage speed of less than25 mph (40 km/h).

. Yellow indicates slightly impairedtraffic flow with average speedbetween 25 mph (40 km/h) and45 mph(72 km/h).

. Green indicates normal trafficflow with average speed above45 mph (72 km/h).

. Orange indicates construction.

Traffic flow data arrows displayon the map when scaled up toeight miles.

Closed Road, Traffic Delays,Incidents, and Advisories — Thesefour screen buttons are used toselect the traffic event ICONS thatappear on the map screens.

Alert for Approaching TrafficEvents: When On, if anapproaching traffic event is withinthe alert range, one of two trafficalert pop-up screens display:. With no route planned, while

on expressways, ApproachingTraffic Event without Avoidscreen displays.

. With route planned, Traffic Eventon Route screen displays.

If the Alert for Approaching TrafficEvents is Off, the alert pop-upscreen does not display.



On-Route

Select the On Route screen buttonto display all events ahead on thecurrent active route. If no trafficevents have been reported on route,No Traffic Events Reported Onroute displays.

Name

Select the Name screen button todisplay traffic events in the orderof distance. The closest event isshown first.

Refresh

Select the Refresh screen button toupdate the screen with all of thelatest traffic events, miles, etc.

Traffic events update approximatelyevery two minutes. To update theevents immediately, press theRefresh screen button.

Scrolling to Traffic Events onthe Map

While scrolling the map, trafficcondition icons may appear.Traffic events may appear up to

75 mi (125 km) from your currentposition. To receive informationabout the traffic condition, placethe cross hairs over the trafficcondition icon.

After selecting the INFO(information) screen button,the type of traffic condition, thestreet name, and a descriptionof the traffic condition displays.See “Scrolling the Map” under Mapson page 7‑62 for more information.

To display traffic events in anotherstate or a great distance away,scroll to the desired area, andthen stop scrolling. Wait for thetraffic to update. It may take up totwo minutes before traffic in this newarea can be received and displayed.



Traffic Event Display Categories

The following are traffic conditioncategories and symbols that canappear on the display:

Category 1, Road Closure:

q (Road Closed): Road and/orramps closed.

Category 2, Traffic Delayed:

o (Stopped Traffic): Trafficstopped, stop and go traffic, delayedand congested traffic.

Category 3, Incidents:

p (Alert): Object in the roadway,disabled vehicle, or dangerous roadconditions.

t (Accident): Roadway obstructeddue to accident.

s (Road Works): Delayed trafficdue to construction.

Category 4, Advisories:

j / r (Road Condition): Delayedor stopped traffic, lane blocked orclosed due to a road condition.

k (Weather): Heavy rain, snow,or fog weather condition.

m (Parking): Availableparking area.

l (Information): Special event,general information, or warning.

Detailed Traffic Event Screens

Traffic Event Screen

The detailed Traffic Event screensare used to display additionaldetails of a traffic event condition.This screen may display if:. Scrolling to an event on the map

and then pressing INFO.. Selecting a traffic event listed on

the Traffic Event List screen.

The Traffic Event screen maydisplay when approaching a trafficevent.



Back, Map, More, and Avoid

These buttons have commonfunctions across all three DetailedTraffic Event screens.

Back: Press to return to theprevious screen.

Map: If available, press to displaythe related traffic event on the map.

Map Traffic Event Icon with BackScreen

More: Press to display more of thetraffic event description, if the wholeevent does not fit in the givendisplay.

Avoid: This button is used to avoidthe location of an event on theroute. If selected, a new route iscalculated and the related trafficevent is avoided. After the newroute has been calculated, thenavigation system goes to the fullmap screen and shows the newroute.

The Avoid button is only available ifthe event is on the route ahead.

Traffic Voice Prompts

The traffic voice prompts arepart of the current navigation voiceprompts. If the navigation voiceprompts are turned off, all trafficprompts are also turned off.

If the voice prompts are on,whenever an Alert for ApproachingTraffic is displayed, the systemgives the related voice prompt.The content of the voice promptdepends on actual traffic event data.

The RPT (Repeat) control button isfor navigation traffic maneuversonly. It is not used to repeat traffic

prompts. During a traffic voiceprompt, if RPT is pressed, thecurrent prompt playback cancels.

Traffic prompts are disabled duringOnStar (if equipped) or VoiceRecognition activity.

Display

Press the CONFIG control button toenter the configure menu options,then press CONFIG again,repeatedly until Display is selectedor press the Display screen button.



Display Off

Press this screen button to turn thedisplay off. Press any control buttonto view the display.

Brightness/Contrast/Mode

Press this screen button to changethe brightness, contrast, and modeof the display.

] (Brightness): Press + (plus) or− (minus) to increase or decreasethe brightness of the screen.

_ (Contrast): Press + (plus) or− (minus) to increase or decreasethe contrast of the screen.

Auto (Automatic): Press so thesystem can automatically adjust thescreen background depending onexterior lighting conditions.

Night: Press to make the mapbackground darker.

Day: Press to make the mapbackground brighter.

Setting the Clock

The navigation system time and theanalog clock operate independently.Changing the time through thenavigation system does not changethe time on the analog clock.See Clock on page 5‑8 to changethe analog clock time.

Press the CONFIG control button toenter the configure menu options,then press CONFIG again,repeatedly until the time is selectedor press the time screen button.

Hours: Press − (minus) or + (plus)to decrease or increase the hours.

Minutes: Press − (minus) or+ (plus) to decrease or increase theminutes.

12/24 Format: Select the12 screen button for standard time;select the 24 screen button formilitary time.



Global PositioningSystem (GPS)The navigation system determinesthe position of the vehicle by usingsatellite signals, various vehiclesignals, and map data.

At times, other interferences suchas the satellite condition, roadconfiguration, the condition of thevehicle and/or other circumstancescan interfere with the navigationsystem's ability to determine theaccurate position of the vehicle.

The GPS shows the current positionof the vehicle using signals sent bythe GPS Satellites of the UnitedStates Department of Defense.

When the vehicle is not receivingsignals from the satellites, a symbolappears on the map screen. Referto Global Positioning System (GPS)on page 7‑96.

This system may not be available orinterferences may occur if any of thefollowing are true:. Signals are obstructed by tall

buildings, trees, large trucks,or a tunnel.

. Objects are located on the frontdash of the vehicle.

. Satellites are being repaired orimproved.

. After-market glass tinting hasbeen applied to the vehicle'swindshield.

Notice: Do not applyafter-market glass tinting tothe vehicle's windows. Glasstinting interferes with thesystem's ability to receive GPSsignals and causes the system tomalfunction. The window mighthave to be replaced to correctthe problem. This would not becovered by the warranty.

For more information if the GPSis not functioning properly, seeVehicle Positioning on page 7‑97and Problems with Route Guidanceon page 7‑97.



Vehicle PositioningAt times, the position of the vehicleon the map may be inaccurate dueto one or more of the followingreasons:. Road system has changed.. Vehicle is driving on slippery

road surfaces such as in sand,gravel, and/or snow.

. Vehicle is traveling on windingroads.

. Vehicle is on a longstraight road.

. Vehicle is approaching a tallbuilding or a large vehicle.

. Surface streets run parallel to afreeway.

. Vehicle has just been transferredby a vehicle carrier or a ferry.

. Current position calibration is setincorrectly.

. Vehicle is traveling at highspeed.

. Vehicle changes directions morethan once, or when the vehicleis turning on a turn table in aparking lot.

. Vehicle is entering and/or exitinga parking lot or a garage.

. GPS signal is not received.

. Roof carrier is installed on thevehicle.

. Vehicle is being driven with tirechains.

. Tires are replaced.

. Tire pressure for the tires isincorrect.

. Tires are worn.

. First time the map DVD isinserted.

. Battery is disconnected forseveral days.

. Vehicle is driving in heavy trafficwhere driving is at low speeds,and the vehicle is stopped andstarted repeatedly.

See your dealer if other problemsoccur.

Problems with RouteGuidanceThe map data supplied through thecompact flash drive and installed inyour vehicle when it was producedis the most up-to-date informationavailable. The map data is updatedperiodically, provided that the mapinformation has changed.

Contact your dealer for

If you have any questions about theoperation of the navigation systemor the update process, contactthe GM Nav Disc Center toll‐freephone number, 1‐877‐NAV‐DISC(1‐877‐628‐3472) or goto the center's website,www.gmnavdisc.com. If youneed any updates, contactyour dealer.



If the System NeedsServiceInappropriate route guidance mayoccur under one or more of thefollowing conditions:. You have not turned onto the

road indicated.. Route guidance may not be

available when using automaticrerouting for the next right orleft turn.

. The route may not be changedwhen using automatic rerouting.

. There is no route guidance whenturning at an intersection.

. Plural names of places may beannounced occasionally.

. It may take a long time tooperate automatic reroutingduring high-speed driving.

. Automatic rerouting may displaya route returning to the setstopover if you are heading fora destination without passingthrough a set stopover.

. The route prohibits the entry of avehicle due to a regulation bytime or season or any otherregulation which may be given.

. Some routes may not besearched.

. The route to the destination maynot be shown if there are newroads, if roads have recentlychanged, or if certain roadsare not listed on the map DVD.See Database CoverageExplanations on page 7‑98.

To recalibrate the vehicle's positionon the map, see your dealer.

Map Data UpdatesThe navigation map database isstored on a compact flash card. It isusable only in this type of navigationsystem, and will not function in otherelectronic devices.

The map in the vehicle was installedby the factory and is the mostup-to-date information availableas the vehicle was produced.This map may have to be updatedperiodically, provided that themap information has changed.See your dealer for service.

Database CoverageExplanationsCoverage area depends upon themap detail available. Some areashave greater map detail than others.The navigation system works onlyas well as the information providedon the stored map data. See MapData Updates on page 7‑98 on howto obtain updated map information.



Voice RecognitionThe navigation system'svoice recognition allows forhands-free operation of thenavigation system, audio system,and OnStar (if equipped) features.The DVD map disc must beinstalled in the navigation systemfor voice recognition to work.See Maps on page 7‑62 formore information.

Voice recognition can be used whenthe ignition is on or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

To use voice recognition:

1. Press and hold the SRCE buttonon the steering wheel until youhear a beep. The audio systemmutes.

2. Clearly state one of thecommands listed on thefollowing pages.

Helpful Hints for StatingCommands. When a multiple command is

available, choose the commandthat works best.

. Words that are in brackets areoptional. For example, for thecommand Radio [band] [select]FM, stating Radio FM or Radioselect FM are both validcommands.

. When the system recognizes thecommand the system does oneof the following:

‐ Perform the function.

‐ Ask you to confirm yourchoice.

‐ Issue an error message“Did not recognize. VoiceRecognition Canceled.”

. If you experience difficultywith the system recognizing acommand, try saying it moresoftly, and wait for a fewseconds after the beep,or repeat the command.



. Background noise maycause voice commands tobe misunderstood, includingairflow noise from wind.

. To use the voice recognitionsystem, the map DVD mustbe loaded and the navigationsystem must be on.

This system is able to recognizecommands in three differentlanguages. The system onlyrecognizes commands based onthe language selected from theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑26 for more information.

Voice Recognition Commands

The following list shows all of thevoice commands available for thenavigation system with a briefdescription of each. The commandsare listed with the optional wordsin brackets. To use the voicecommands, refer to the instructionslisted previously.

Voice Tag Commands

The following are voice tagcommands that can be accessedby clearly stating the commandsexactly as they are written. Thereare up to 40 voice tag entries fordestinations.

Navigation go to [destination],navigation select: Thesecommands instruct the system toselect a destination saved underthe voice tag you have stored.The system prompts for adestination name then waitsfor you to state the name.

If not currently driving on a route,the system automatically createsthe voice tag destination as the finaldestination. If driving on a route, thesystem automatically creates thevoice tag destination as a stopover.Up to three stopovers can becreated.

Storing Voice Tags

From the address book entryinformation page, press theAdd Voice tag screen button. Thesystem responds “Name Please?”and you will have four seconds torecord a name. The system asksfor confirmation of the name beforesaving it as a voice tag.

Navigation Help

Navigation Help: This commandinstructs the system to assist withnavigation commands.

Display Commands

Use the following display commandsto set the display mode.

Display [set] day [mode]: Sets thedisplay to daytime mode.

Display [set] night [mode]: Setsthe display to night mode.

Display [set] auto [mode]: Setsthe display to automatic mode.The system changes between dayand night mode automatically.



System help: Instructs the systemto assist with display commands.

Radio Commands

The following are radio commandsthat can be accessed by clearlystating the commands exactly asthey are written.

Radio [band] [select] AM,radio [band] [select] FM, radio[band] [select] XM (if equipped),radio [band] [select] satellite(if equipped): Instructs the systemto go to either the AM, FM, or XM(if equipped).

Radio [select] (frequency) AM,radio [select] (frequency) FM:Instructs the system to go to aspecific frequency on either AMor FM.

Radio [select] (channel) XM(if equipped), radio [select](channel) satellite (if equipped):Instructs the system to go to aspecific channel on the XM™ band(if equipped).

Radio help: Instructs the system toassist with radio commands.

CD Commands

The following are CD, MP3, andDVD commands that can beaccessed by clearly stating thecommands exactly as they arewritten.

CD, DVD, Disc: Use this commandto select a CD, DVD, or disc that iscurrently loaded.

CD, DVD, Disc, [select] track(one, two, three, etc.): Instructsthe system to select a specific tracknumber.

CD, DVD, Disc select nextfolder: Use this command toselect the next folder on the MP3or audio DVD.

CD, DVD, Disc select previousfolder: Use this command to selectthe previous folder on the MP3 oraudio DVD.

CD help, DVD help, Disc help:Instructs the system to assist withCD and DVD commands.

Auxiliary Commands

The following auxiliary commandscan be accessed by clearly statingthe commands exactly as theyare written. The commands areavailable when the auxiliary sourceis available.

Aux, Auxiliary: Use this commandto select the auxiliary device, whena device is connected.

Voice Help

Voice help: Provides a descriptionof help commands that can be used.



Phone

BluetoothVehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profileto make and receive phone calls.The system can be used whilethe key is in the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY position.The range of the Bluetooth systemcan be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not allphones support all functions, andnot all phones are guaranteed towork with the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem. See www.gm.com/bluetoothfor more information on compatiblephones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until thetone and then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides theaudio system. Use the audiosystem volume knob, during acall, to change the volume level.The adjusted volume level remainsin memory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

b g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth systemand then connected to the vehiclebefore it can be used. See your cellphone manufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar Hands‐Free Calling,if equipped. Refer to the OnStarOwner's Guide for more information.



Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phonesare within range of the system,the system connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named“Your Vehicle” in the list onthe cell phone. Follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the PIN that was providedin Step 3. After the PIN issuccessfully entered, the systemprompts you to provide a name

for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. See “Listing All Pairedand Connected Phones” later inthis section for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.



3. Say “List.”



Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Dependingon which cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsin the Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.



Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial orcall command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allowsa phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial : This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.



Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g to answer the call.

. Presscx to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when anothercall is active. The original callis placed on hold.

. Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Presscx to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.



Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Presscx to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b g, andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b g, andthen say “Un‐mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle,use the audio transfer feature onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready,”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers storedas name tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted outof the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tags inthe phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear SeatAudio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation systemdescribed later in this section.

Climate Control with Heated and Cooled Seats shown

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Recirculation

E. Rear Window Defogger

F. Air Conditioning

G. Heated and Cooled Seats

H. Fan Control


8-2 Climate Controls

I. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

J. Air Delivery Mode Control

Off: Press the driver sidetemperature knob to turn theclimate control system off. Outsideair still enters the vehicle, and isdirected to the floor. This directioncan be changed by pressing themode button. The temperaturecan also be adjusted using eithertemperature knob. Press the upor down arrows on the fan switch,the defrost button, the AUTO button,driver side temperature knob, or theair conditioning button to turn thesystem on when it is off.

Driver and Passenger SideTemperature Knob

The driver and passenger sidetemperature knobs are used toadjust the temperature of the aircoming through the system onthe driver or passenger side ofthe vehicle. The temperature canbe adjusted even if the system isturned off. This is possible sinceoutside air always flows throughthe system as the vehicle ismoving forward unless it isset to recirculation mode.See “Recirculation” later inthis section.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the cabin temperature.The display will show thetemperature setting increasingor decreasing.

Set the passenger temperaturesetting to match the drivertemperature setting by pressingthe passenger temperature knob.

When in defrost mode thepassenger temperature settingcannot be changed.



Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Whenautomatic operation is activethe system will control the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.

Use the steps below to place theentire system in automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, thedisplay will change to showthe current temperature(s) andAUTO come on the display.The current delivery mode andfan speed will also be displayedfor approximately 5 seconds.

When AUTO is selected, theair conditioning operation andair inlet will be automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioningcompressor will run when theoutside temperature is overabout 4°C (40°F). The air inletwill normally be set to outside

air. If it is hot outside, the airinlet may automatically switchto recirculate inside air to helpquickly cool down the vehicle.The light on the button comeson in recirculation.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting,start with a 23°C (74°F)temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the systemto regulate. Use the driver orpassenger temperature buttonsto adjust the temperature settingas necessary. If a temperaturesetting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen,the system remains at themaximum cooling setting.If a temperature setting of32°C (90°F) is chosen, thesystem remains at the maximumheat setting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not causethe vehicle to heat or cool anyfaster.

Be careful not to cover thesensor located on the top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulatesair temperature based on sun loadand also turns on the headlamps.

To avoid blowing cold air in coldweather, the system will delayturning on the fan until warm airis available. The length of delaydepends on the engine coolanttemperature. Pressing the fanswitch will override this delay andchange the fan to a selected speed.



Manual Operation

y9z (Fan Control): Press theup or down arrows to increase ordecrease the fan speed

Pressing this button when thesystem is off will turn the system on.

Pressing either arrow while usingautomatic operation will place thefan in manual operation. The fansetting will display and the AUTOlight will turn off. The air deliverywill remain in automatic operation.

z (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to change the direction of theairflow in the vehicle. Repeatedlypress the button until the desiredmode appears on the display.

When the system is turned off, thedisplay goes blank after displayingthe current status of the system.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directed

towards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper vents andwarmer air to the floor vents.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some to thewindshield, side window outlets,and second row floor outlets. In thismode, the system automaticallyselects outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.In this mode, the system turnsoff recirculation and runs the airconditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is close tofreezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefog mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents,with some directed to the floor

vents. In this mode, the systemautomatically forces outside airinto the vehicle and runs the airconditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is close tofreezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

The passenger temperature controlcannot be activated while in defrostmode. If the passenger controlknob is pressed, the passengertemperature flashes three timesand will not work. If the passengercontrol knob is adjusted, the drivertemperature indicator changes.The passenger temperature willnot be displayed.

If vent, bi-level, or floor mode isselected again, the climate controlsystem displays the previoustemperature settings.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.



# (Air Conditioning): Pressto turn the air conditioning (A/C)compressor on and off. An indicatorlight comes on to show that the airconditioning is on.

Pressing this button when theoutside temperature is too cool forair conditioning will make the airconditioning indicator flash 3 timesand then turn off indicating the airconditioning mode is not available.If the air conditioning is on and theoutside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for airconditioning to be effective, the airconditioning light turns off to showthat the air conditioning mode hasbeen canceled.

On hot days, open the windows longenough to let hot inside air escape.This helps to reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air,so a small amount of water mightdrip under the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light comes on to showthat the recirculation is on.

This mode recirculates and helpsto quickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odorsfrom entering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostmodes. If recirculation is selectedwith one of those modes, theindicator light flashes three timesand then turns off. The air

conditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode thewindows may fog when the weatheris cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

The recirculation mode can also beturned off by turning off the ignition.

REAR (Rear Climate Control): Forvehicles with the rear heating andair conditioning controls. Press theREAR button to turn the rear climatecontrol system on or off. See RearClimate Control System (RearClimate with Rear Seat Audio) onpage 8‑6.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.



< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. It automaticallyturns off after it has been activated.The defogger can also be turned offby turning off the engine. Do notdrive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Heated Mirrors: Press< to helpclear fog or frost from the surfaceof the outside mirror. See “OutsideHeated Mirrors” in Heated Mirrorson page 2‑17.

Heated or Cooled Seats: Forvehicles with heated and cooledseats, see Heated and VentilatedFront Seats on page 3‑8.

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with RearSeat Audio)For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they areintegrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console.The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rearcontrols.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

REAR: Press the REAR button onthe front climate control system toturn the rear climate control systemon or off. An indicator comes onwhen the rear system is on.



The rear climate control systemcan also be turned off by pressingand holding the C button. To turnthe system on from the rear seats,press any rear climate controlbutton, except the C button.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control airflow settings.It comes on when REAR is pressedthe first time.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings ofthe rear controls.

To turn the system on from therear, press any rear climate controlbutton, except the C button.

Automatic Operation, IfEquipped

AUTO: Press the air delivery modebutton until this setting is selectedto control the inside temperature,air delivery, and fan speed. AUTOappears in the display whenautomatic operation is active.

+/− (Increase/DecreaseTemperature): Press the + or −buttons to increase or decrease thecabin temperature. The rear controltemperature display will show thetemperature setting increasing ordecreasing.

The display only indicates climatecontrol functions when the system isin rear independent mode.

Manual Operation

D C (Fan Control): Press thesebuttons on the rear seat audiocontrol panel to increase ordecrease the airflow. Pressingthe fan up button when the systemis off will turn the system on.The air delivery mode will remainunder automatic control.

+/− (Temperature Control):Press these buttons to adjust thetemperature of the air flowing intothe passenger area. Press the+ button for warmer air and pressthe − button for cooler air.

N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press the mode button to changethe direction of the airflow in thevehicle. Repeatedly press thebutton until the desired modeappears on the display. Multiplepresses will cycle through thedelivery selections.



Air VentsUse the air outlets located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel to direct theairflow.

Operation Tips. Keep the hood and front air

inlets free of ice, snow, orany other obstruction (suchas leaves). The heater anddefroster will work far better,reducing the chance of foggingthe inside of the windows.

. When you enter a vehicle incold weather, press the fan upbutton to the maximum fan levelbefore driving. This helps clearthe intake ducts of snow andmoisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the insideof the window.

. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects. This helpsair to circulate throughout thevehicle.

. Adding outside equipment tothe front of the vehicle, such ashood-air deflectors, may affectthe performance of the heatingand air conditioning system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-18Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-20Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-23Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-30Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Active FuelManagement™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-40Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-47Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Road Sensing Suspension . . . 9-50Continuous DampingControl (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-50

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-54Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-64Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-64California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-65Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-66Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70


9-2 Driving and Operating

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑22.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be careless

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.



Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness,and judgment can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you driveafter drinking. Do not drink anddrive or ride with a driver who hasbeen drinking. Ride home in acab; or if you are with a group,designate a driver who will notdrink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's systemcan make crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,

spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑47.

Adding non‐dealer accessoriescan affect vehicle performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.



BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑21.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doingit is reaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might beless with one driver and as longas two or three seconds or morewith another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination,and eyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three‐fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft).That could be a lot of distancein an emergency, so keepingenough space between thevehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the conditionof the road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakesmight not have time to cool betweenhard stops. The brakes will wearout much faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops whilethe vehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessoriescan affect vehicle performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.



Steering

Power Steering


If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and theroad surface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steeringcan be more effective than braking.For example, you come over a hilland find a truck stopped in yourlane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts outfrom between parked cars and stopsright in front of you. These problemscan be avoided by braking— if youcan stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot stop in time becausethere is no room. That is the timefor evasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. First,apply the brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑4. It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from a

collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.



The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder isonly slightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.

Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steerso that the vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. Turn thesteering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to5 inches), about one-eighth turn,until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide,ease your foot off the acceleratorpedal and quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.



Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your drivingto these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learnto recognize warning clues— suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface— and slow downwhen you have any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingVehicles with all‐wheel drive can beused for off‐road driving. Vehicleswithout all‐wheel drive and vehicleswith 22‐inch tire/wheel assembliesshould not be driven off-road excepton a level, solid surface.

Many of the vehicle design featuresthat help make the vehicle moreresponsive on paved roads duringpoor weather conditions also helpmake it better suited for off‐roaduse than conventional passengervehicles. The vehicle does nothave features usually thought tobe necessary for extended orsevere off‐road use such as specialunderbody shielding and transfercase low gear range.

The airbag system is designed towork properly under a wide rangeof conditions, including off‐roadusage. Always wear your safety beltand observe safe driving speeds,especially on rough terrain.

Drinking and driving can be verydangerous on any road and this iscertainly true for off-road driving.At the very time you need specialalertness and driving skills, yourreflexes, perceptions, and judgmentcan be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have aserious — or even fatal — accidentif you drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking.

Off-roading can be great fun but hassome definite hazards. The greatestof these is the terrain itself. Whenoff-road driving, traffic lanes are notmarked, curves are not banked, andthere are no road signs. Surfacescan be slippery, rough, uphill,or downhill.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers. Failure to operate thevehicle correctly off‐road couldresult in loss of vehicle controlor vehicle rollover.



Off-roading involves some newskills. That is why it is veryimportant that you read thesedriving tips and suggestions tohelp make off-road driving saferand more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-Roading. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work done.. Make sure there is enough fuel,

that fluid levels are where theyshould be, and that the sparetire, if the vehicle has one, isfully inflated.

. Be sure to read all theinformation about all-wheel-drivevehicles in this manual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if the vehicle has them,are properly attached.

. Know the local laws that applyto off-roading where you willbe driving or check with lawenforcement people in the area.

. Be sure to get the necessarypermission if you will be onprivate land.

If you think you will need somemore ground clearance at the frontof your vehicle, you can removethe front fascia lower air dam.The air dam is held in place bytwo bolts and 10 snaps accessiblefrom underneath the front fascia.

To remove the air dam:

1. Remove the two outboard airdam bolts.

2. With a flat‐blade tool, disengagethe snaps.

3. After the bolts are removed andthe snaps are disengaged, pushforward on the air dam until itis free.

Notice: Operating your vehiclefor extended periods withoutthe front fascia lower air daminstalled can cause improper airflow to the engine. Always besure to replace the front fasciaair dam when you are finishedoff-road driving.

After off-roading, be sure to reinstallthe air dam:

1. Line up the snaps and push theair dam rearward to engage thesnaps.

2. Install the two outboard bolts.



Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Cargo on the load floor piledhigher than the seatbackscan be thrown forward duringa sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top ofthe seatbacks.

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struckby flying objects. Securethe cargo properly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof. Keep cargo in thecargo area as far forwardand low as possible.

There are some important things toremember about how to load yourvehicle.. The heaviest things should be

on the floor, forward of the rearaxle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can.

. Be sure the load is properlysecured, so things are nottossed around.

You will find other importantinformation under Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑24 and Tires onpage 10‑50.



Environmental Concerns

Off-road driving can providewholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it alsoraises environmental concerns.We recognize these concernsand urge every off-roader to followthese basic rules for protecting theenvironment:. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenspecially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving andobey all posted regulations.

. Avoid any driving practicethat could damage shrubs,flowers, trees, or grasses ordisturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking downtrees, or unnecessary drivingthrough streams or over softground.

. Always carry a litter bag andmake sure all refuse is removedfrom any campsite beforeleaving.

. Take extreme care with openfires (where permitted), campstoves, and lanterns.

. Never park your vehicle overdry grass or other combustiblematerials that could catch firefrom the heat of the vehicle'sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip,especially when going to a remotearea. Know the terrain and planyour route. Get accurate maps oftrails and terrain. Check to see ifthere are any blocked or closedroads.

It is also a good idea to travel withat least one other vehicle in casesomething happens to one of them.

For vehicles with a winch, be sureto read the winch instructions. In aremote area, a winch can be handyif you get stuck but you will want toknow how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDriving

It is a good idea to practice in anarea that is safe and close to homebefore you go into the wilderness.Off-roading requires some new anddifferent skills.

Tune your senses to different kindsof signals. Your eyes need toconstantly sweep the terrain forunexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire orengine sounds. Use your arms,hands, feet, and body to respondto vibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed. At higherspeeds:. You approach things faster and

have less time to react.. There is less time to scan the

terrain for obstacles.



. The vehicle has more bouncewhen driving over obstacles.

. More braking distance isneeded, especially on anunpaved surface.

{ WARNING

When you are driving off-road,bouncing and quick changes indirection can easily throw youout of position. This could causeyou to lose control and crash.So, whether you are driving onor off the road, you and yourpassengers should wear safetybelts.

Scanning the Terrain

Off-road driving can take you overmany different kinds of terrain.Be familiar with the terrain and itsmany different features.

Surface Conditions: Off-roadingsurfaces can be hard-packed dirt,gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the vehicle's steering,acceleration, and braking in differentways. Depending on the surface,slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction,and longer braking distances canoccur.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen orhidden obstacles can be hazardous.A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump canstartle you if you are not preparedfor them. Often these obstacles arehidden by grass, bushes, snow,or even the rise and fall of theterrain itself.

Some things to consider:. Is the path ahead clear?. Will the surface texture change

abruptly up ahead?. Does the travel take you uphill or

downhill?. Will you have to stop suddenly

or change direction quickly?



When driving over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip onthe steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands.

When driving over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles, the wheels canleave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, youcannot control the vehicle as wellor at all.

Because you will be on an unpavedsurface, it is especially important toavoid sudden acceleration, suddenturns, or sudden braking.

Off-roading requires a different kindof alertness from driving on pavedroads and highways. There are noroad signs, posted speed limits,or signal lights. Use good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.

Driving on Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgmentand an understanding of what thevehicle can and cannot do. Thereare some hills that simply cannot bedriven, no matter how well built thevehicle.

{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. If you drive upthem, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you cannot controlyour speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about thesteepness, do not drive the hill.

Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, decideif it is too steep to climb, descend,or cross. Steepness can be hardto judge. On a very small hill, forexample, there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a smallchange in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top.On a large hill, the incline may getsteeper as you near the top, butyou might not see this because thecrest of the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.

Consider this as you approach a hill:. Is there a constant incline,

or does the hill get sharplysteeper in places?

. Is there good traction on thehillside, or will the surface causetire slipping?

. Is there a straight path upor down the hill so you willnot have to make turningmaneuvers?



. Are there obstructions on the hillthat can block your path, suchas boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

. What is beyond the hill? Isthere a cliff, an embankment, adrop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know.It is the smart way to find out.

. Is the hill simply too rough?Steep hills often have ruts,gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are moresusceptible to the effects oferosion.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide it is safe to driveup the hill:. Use a low gear and get a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Get a smooth start up the

hill and try to maintain speed.Not using more power thanneeded can avoid spinningthe wheels or sliding.

{ WARNING

Turning or driving across steephills can be dangerous. You couldlose traction, slide sideways, andpossibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. Whendriving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

. Try to drive straight up the hill ifat all possible. If the path twistsand turns, you might want to findanother route.

. Ease up on the speed as youapproach the top of the hill.

. Attach a flag to the vehicle tobe more visible to approachingtraffic on trails or hills.

. Sound the horn as you approachthe top of the hill to let opposingtraffic know you are there.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible to oncoming traffic.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top (crest) of ahill at full speed can cause anaccident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff,or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

If the vehicle stalls, or is about tostall, and you cannot make it upthe hill:. Push the brake pedal to stop the

vehicle and keep it from rollingbackwards and apply theparking brake.

. If the engine is still running, shiftthe transmission to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill inR (Reverse).



. If the engine has stoppedrunning, you need to restart it.With the brake pedal pressedand the parking brake stillapplied, shift the transmission toP (Park) and restart the engine.Then, shift to R (Reverse),release the parking brake,and slowly back down thehill as straight as possiblein R (Reverse).

. While backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steeringwheel at the 12 o'clock positionso you can tell if the wheels arestraight and can maneuver asyou back down. It is best to backdown the hill with the wheelsstraight rather than in the left orright direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right willincrease the possibility of arollover.

Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, when going upa hill:. Never attempt to prevent a stall

by shifting into N (Neutral) torev-up the engine and regainforward momentum. This willnot work. The vehicle can rollbackward very quickly andcould go out of control.

. Never try to turn around if aboutto stall when going up a hill.If the hill is steep enough tostall the vehicle, it is steepenough to cause it to roll over.If you cannot make it up the hill,back straight down the hill.

If, after stalling, you try to backdown the hill and decide you justcannot do it, set the parking brake,put your transmission in P (Park),and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exiton the uphill side and stay clear ofthe path the vehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

Driving Downhill

When off-roading takes youdownhill, consider:. How steep is the downhill?

Will I be able to maintain vehiclecontrol?

. What is the surface like?Smooth? Rough? Slippery?Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

. Are there hidden surfaceobstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?

. What is at the bottom of the hill?Is there a hidden creek bank oreven a river bottom with largerocks?



If you decide you can go down ahill safely, try to keep the vehicleheaded straight down. Use a lowgear so engine drag can help thebrakes so they do not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keepingthe vehicle under control at alltimes.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply thebrakes lightly when descendinga hill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

Things not to do when driving downa hill:. When driving downhill, avoid

turns that take you across theincline of the hill. A hill that is nottoo steep to drive down mightbe too steep to drive across.The vehicle could roll over.

. Never go downhill with thetransmission in N (Neutral),called free-wheeling. The brakeswill have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade.

Vehicles are much more likely tostall when going uphill, but if ithappens when going downhill:

1. Stop the vehicle by applying theregular brakes and apply theparking brake.

2. Shift to P (Park) and, while stillbraking, restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, releasethe parking brake, and drivestraight down.

4. If the engine will not start, getout and get help.

Driving Across an Incline

An off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. To decidewhether to try to drive across theincline, consider the following:

{ WARNING

Driving across an incline that istoo steep will make your vehicleroll over. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it.Find another route instead.

. A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steepto drive across. When goingstraight up or down a hill, thelength of the wheel base — thedistance from the front wheelsto the rear wheels — reducesthe likelihood the vehiclewill tumble end over end.



But when driving across anincline, the narrower trackwidth — the distance betweenthe left and right wheels — mightnot prevent the vehicle fromtilting and rolling over. Drivingacross an incline puts moreweight on the downhill wheelswhich could cause a downhillslide or a rollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline evenworse. If you drive across a rockwith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

For these reasons, carefullyconsider whether to try to driveacross an incline. Just becausethe trail goes across the inclinedoes not mean you have to drive it.The last vehicle to try it might haverolled over.

If you feel the vehicle startingto slide sideways, turn downhill.This should help straighten outthe vehicle and prevent the sideslipping. The best way to preventthis is to “walk the course” first, soyou know what the surface is likebefore driving it.

Stalling on an Incline

{ WARNING

Getting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

If the vehicle stalls when crossingan incline, be sure you, and anypassengers, get out on the uphillside, even if the door there is harderto open. If you get out on thedownhill side and the vehicle startsto roll over, you will be right inits path.

If you have to walk down the slope,stay out of the path the vehicle willtake if it does roll over.



Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow,or sand, the wheels do not getgood traction. Acceleration is notas quick, turning is more difficult,and braking distances are longer.

It is best to use a low gear whenin mud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. In really deep mud,keep the vehicle moving so it doesnot get stuck.

When driving on sand, wheeltraction changes. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sanddunes, the tires will tend to sinkinto the sand. This affects steering,accelerating, and braking. Drive ata reduced speed and avoid sharpturns or abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offerthe worst tire traction. On thesesurfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example,the traction is so poor that youwill have difficulty accelerating.And, if the vehicle does get moving,poor steering and difficult brakingcan cause it to slide out of control.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous.Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehiclecould fall through the ice andyou and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, andyou could lose traction and rollthe vehicle over. Do not drivethrough rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,and flood waters demand extremecaution.



Find out how deep the water isbefore driving through it. Do nottry it if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe — you probably will not getthrough. Deep water can damagethe axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, driveslowly through it. At faster speeds,water splashes on the ignitionsystem and the vehicle can stall.Stalling can also occur if you get thetailpipe under water. If the tailpipe isunder water, you will never be ableto start the engine. When goingthrough water, remember that whenthe brakes get wet, it might takelonger to stop. See Driving on WetRoads on page 9‑18.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,chassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

The vehicle requires more frequentservice due to off-road use. Referto the Maintenance Schedule foradditional information.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying todrive through flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑50.

. Turn off cruise control.



Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes willhave to do all the work of slowingdown and they could get so hotthat they would not work well.You would then have poor brakingor even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.



. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay inyour own lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something couldbe in your lane (stalledcar, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑45 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideService (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside Service(Mexico) on page 13‑10. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about5 cm (2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air insidethe vehicle and set the fanspeed to the highest setting.See Climate Control Systemin the Index.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑38.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and killyou. You cannot see it or smell it,so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.



To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engineruns faster than the idle speed.This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do thisas little as possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking Your Vehicle to GetIt Out” later in this section.

If the vehicle has a tractionsystem, it can often help to free astuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, andyou or others could be injured.The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 55 km/h(35 mph) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑72.

Rocking Your Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionor stability system. Shift back andforth between R (Reverse) and aforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does notget the vehicle out after a few tries,it might need to be towed out.Recovery hooks can be used, if thevehicle has them. If the vehicle doesneed to be towed out, see Towingthe Vehicle on page 10‑94.



Recovery Hooks

{ WARNING

These hooks, when used, areunder a lot of force. Always pullthe vehicle straight out. Never pullon the hooks at a sideways angle.The hooks could break off andyou or others could be injuredfrom the chain or cablesnapping back.

Notice: Never use recoveryhooks to tow the vehicle.Your vehicle could be damagedand it would not be covered bywarranty.

For vehicles with recovery hooks atthe front of the vehicle, you can usethem if you are stuck off-road andneed to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to knowhow much weight your vehiclecan carry. This weight is calledthe vehicle capacity weightand includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.



{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicleany heavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you tolose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information labelis attached to the centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find thelabel attached below the doorlock post (striker). The tire andloading information label showsthe number of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑50 and Tire Pressureon page 10‑57.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR)for the front and rear axles.See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.



Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400−750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.See Trailer Towing onpage 9‑74 for importantinformation on towing atrailer, towing safety rulesand trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)



Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available CargoWeight = 113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3

A. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.



Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to therear edge of the driver door.The label shows the size ofyour vehicle's original tiresand the inflation pressuresneeded to obtain the grossweight capacity of your vehicle.This is called Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the center line.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you tolose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Your warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.

The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your truck can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not changeyour weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.



If you put things inside yourvehicle— like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving onpage 9‑7.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removableitems, you may need to put alimit on how many people youcan carry inside your vehicle.Be sure to weigh your vehiclebefore you buy and install thenew equipment.

Notice : Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Do not overload the vehicle.

Remember not to exceedthe Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the frontor rear axle.



Automatic Level Control

The automatic level control rearsuspension comes as a part ofthe Road Sensing Suspension.See Road Sensing Suspensionon page 9‑50.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide abetter leveled riding position aswell as better handling under avariety of passenger and loadingconditions. An air compressorconnected to the rear shockswill raise or lower the rear ofthe vehicle to maintain propervehicle height. The systemis activated when the ignition

key is turned to RUN and willautomatically adjust vehicleheight thereafter. The systemmay exhaust (lower vehicleheight) for up to 10 minutes afterthe ignition key has been turnedto LOCK. You may hear the aircompressor operating when theheight is being adjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch isbeing used, it is recommendedto allow the shocks to inflate,thereby leveling the vehicleprior to adjusting the height.See “Weight distributing Hitchesand Weight Carrying Hitches”under Towing Equipment onpage 9‑78.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep your speed at 88 km/h(55mph) or less for the first805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast orslow, for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.



. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are notyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailerduring break-in. See TrailerTowing on page 9‑74 for thetrailer towing capabilitiesof the vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalThe vehicle has adjustable throttleand brake pedals that allow you tochange their positions.

The feature will not operate whenthe vehicle is in R (Reverse) orwhile using the cruise control.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is located on the centerconsole below the climate controlsystem.

Press the right and left arrows tomove the pedals either closer orfurther from your body.

Before you start driving, fullypress the brake pedal to confirmthe adjustment is right for you.While driving, make only smalladjustments.

The vehicle has a memory functionwhich allows the pedal positionsto be saved and recalled. See“Memory Features” under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑3 formore information.



Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), theignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal must be applied.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑35

This position locks the ignition.It may also lock the steeringwheel and automatic transmission.The key can be removed inLOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will causea loss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral.This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto neutral, firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicleto a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 9‑46



The steering may bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition lets things like the radioand the windshield wipers operatewhile the engine is off. Use thisposition if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

C (ON/RUN): This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. The switchstays in this position when theengine is running. The transmissionis also unlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

If you leave the key in theACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition with the engine off, thebattery could be drained. You maynot be able to start the vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This is the positionthat starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key.The ignition switch returns toON/RUN for driving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let goof the key. The idle speed will godown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.



The vehicle has aComputer-ControlledCranking System. This featureassists in starting the engineand protects components.If the ignition key is turnedto the START position, andthen released when the enginebegins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents crankingif the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switchto the ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed in

the Driver Information Center(DIC), the Computer‐ControlledCranking System is disabledto prevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. Whenthis happens, hold the ignitionswitch in the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5‐10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of

15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again,repeat these steps. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until theoil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicleswith an engine heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord may existwhich will prevent engine coolantheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood andunwrap the electrical cord.The cord is secured to theEngine Compartment FuseBlock with a clip. Carefullyremove the wire tie whichsecures the electrical cord.Do not cut the electrical cord.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord into a properlygrounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keepit away from moving engineparts. If you do not, it couldbe damaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessoriescan be used for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. OnStar System (if equipped). Sunroof (if equipped)

These features work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the windows and sunroof continueto work up to 10 minutes until anydoor is opened. The radio continuesto work for up to 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened.



Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑71.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pullingthe shift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehiclewith the engine running, be surethe vehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set. After theshift lever is moved into P (Park),hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pulling it toward you. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).



Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill andyou do not shift the transmissioninto P (Park) properly, the weightof the vehicle can put too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. It might be difficult topull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park on page 9‑36.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforereleasing the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mightneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take someof the pressure from the parkingpawl in the transmission. Then youshould be able to pull the shift leverout of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped withan electronic shift lock releasesystem. The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑89 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.



Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active FuelManagement™Vehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management™. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowingthe vehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an ActiveFuel Management™ indicator, seeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑26 for more information onusing this display.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed areathat has no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑38.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑36.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑71.



AutomaticTransmissionIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

The vehicle has aHydra-Matic® 6L80 automatictransmission, and has anelectronic shift position indicatorwithin the instrument panelcluster. The electronic shift positionindicator displays when the shiftlever is moved out of P (Park).

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

When parked on a hill, especiallywhen the vehicle has a heavy load,you may notice an increase inthe effort to shift out of P (Park).See “Torque Lock” under ShiftingInto Park on page 9‑36 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑36. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑71.



R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑23.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) whenthe vehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load,driving on steep hills, or for off-roaddriving. You may want to shiftthe transmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.



Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑6.

M (Manual Mode): This positionlets drivers select the range ofgears appropriate for current drivingconditions. See “Driver Shift Control(DSC)” under Manual Mode onpage 9‑43.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designedto determine, before making anupshift, if the engine will be able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this may appearto be a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The vehicle's transmissionuses adaptive shift controls thatcompares key shift parametersto pre-programmed ideal shiftsstored in the transmissionscomputer. The transmissionconstantly makes adjustmentsto improve vehicle performanceaccording to how the vehicle isbeing used, such as with a heavyload or when temperature changes.During this adaptive shift controlsprocess, shifting may feel differentas the transmission determines thebest settings.

When temperatures are very cold,the Hydra-Matic® 6L80 automatictransmission's gear shifting maybe delayed providing more stableshifts until the engine warms up.Shifts may be more noticeable witha cold transmission. This differencein shifting is normal.



Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

The vehicle has Driver ShiftControl (DSC). DSC controls thevehicle's transmission and vehiclespeed while driving down hill ortowing a trailer by allowing you toselect a desired range of gears.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever to theM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus button, toupshift or downshift selectingthe desired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions.

The DIC display will show themessage MANUAL SHIFT on thefirst line and the current gear willbe displayed on the second line.The number displayed in the DICis the highest gear that can beused. However, the vehicle canautomatically shift to lower gearsas it adjusts to driving conditions.This means that all gears below thatnumber are available. When 5 (Fifth)is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)gears are automatically shifted bythe vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot beused until the plus/minus buttonlocated on the steering column leveris used to change to the gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenthe Driver Shift Control is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑43for more information.

While using the DSC, CruiseControl and the Tow/Haul Modecan be used.

Tow/Haul Mode

The vehicle has a Tow/Haul Mode.The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling, providing increasedperformance, vehicle control, andtransmission cooling when towingor hauling heavy loads.

Press the button located on the endof the shift lever to turn the tow/haulon or off. When the tow/haul is on, alight on the instrument panel clusterwill come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5‑23 for more information.

Also see “Tow Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑78 formore information.



The Tow/Haul Mode works withthe Autoride® feature, if the vehiclehas this, to enhance the ride whentrailering or with a loaded vehicle.See Continuous Damping Control(CDC) on page 9‑50.

Grade Braking

The Grade Braking shift modescan be activated by pressing thebutton on the end of the shift controllever. While in Range SelectionMode, Grade Braking is deactivatedallowing the driver to select adesired range of gears.

Grade Braking is only active whilethe Tow/Haul Mode is selected andyou are not in the Range SelectionMode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode onpage 9‑43 for more information on

the Range Selection Mode. GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when drivingon downhill grades by automaticallyimplementing a shift schedule thatutilizes the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle. This reduceswear on the braking system andincreases control of the vehicle.Grade Braking monitors vehiclespeed, acceleration, engine torqueand brake pedal usage. Using thisinformation, it detects when thevehicle is on a downhill grade andthe driver desires to slow the vehicleby pressing the brake.

Also see Towing Equipment onpage 9‑78 for more information.

Cruise Grade Braking

Cruise Grade Braking assistswhen driving on a downhill grade.It maintains vehicle speed byautomatically implementing a shiftschedule that uses the engine andthe transmission to slow the vehicle.Cruise Grade Braking operateswhile Cruise Control is engagedin Tow/Haul Mode to assist inmaintaining vehicle speed underloaded vehicle conditions. It utilizesvehicle acceleration and deviationfrom desired speed to determinethe correct gear for the operatingcondition. If vehicle speed is abovethe desired speed the transmissionwill downshift to slow the vehicle.If vehicle speed is near or belowdesired speed the trans will upshift,allowing vehicle speed to increase.

While in the Range SelectionMode, Cruise Grade Braking isnot available.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9‑43.



Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has this feature,engine power is sent to all fourwheels when extra traction isneeded. This is like four-wheeldrive, but there is no separate leveror switch to engage or disengagethe front axle. It is fully automatic,and adjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

If the vehicle is a hybrid, see“Four-Wheel Drive” in the hybridsupplement.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motoror clicking noise might be heardwhile this test is going on, and itmight even be noticed that thebrake pedal moves a little. This isnormal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑22.

If driving safely on a wet roadand it becomes necessary to slamon the brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling,the computer will separately workthe brakes at each wheel.



ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holdingthe regular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑21.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will flash and achime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer andare parking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑71.



Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist thedriver in stopping or decreasingvehicle speed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplementthe power brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle.The stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer-controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path andthe direction the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at anyone of the vehicle's brakes to assistthe driver with keeping the vehicleon the intended path.

When the vehicle is startedand begins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. The

system should initialize before thevehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).In some cases, it may takeapproximately 3.2 km (2 miles) ofdriving before the system initializes.

If cruise control is being usedwhen StabiliTrak activates, thecruise control automaticallydisengages. The cruise controlcan be re-engaged when roadconditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑51.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the StabiliTrak light alongwith one of the following messageswill be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC):TRACTION CONTROL OFF,SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICESTABILITRAK. If these DICmessages appear, make sure theStabiliTrak system has not beenturned off using the StabiliTrak on/off button. Then turn the vehicle off,wait 15 seconds, and then turn itback on again to reset the system.If any of these messages still



appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the vehicle shouldbe taken in for service. For moreinformation on the DIC messages,see Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑26.

The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is both on and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

The traction control disable button islocated on the instrument panel.

The traction control part ofStabiliTrak can be turned offby pressing and releasing theStabiliTrak button if both systems(traction control and StabiliTrak)were previously on. To disable bothtraction control and StabiliTrak,press and hold the button forfive seconds.

Traction control and StabiliTrakcan be turned on by pressing andreleasing the StabiliTrak button ifthey are not automatically shut offfor any other reason.

When the traction control system(TCS) or StabiliTrak system isturned off, the StabiliTrak lightand the appropriate TCS off orStabiliTrak off message will bedisplayed on the DIC to warn thedriver. The vehicle will still havebrake-traction control when tractioncontrol is off, but will not be able touse the engine speed managementsystem. See “Traction ControlOperation” next for moreinformation.

When the traction control systemhas been turned off, system noisesmay still be heard as a result of thebrake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicleto attempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle is Stuckon page 9‑23.

When the transfer case is in 4LO,the stability system is automaticallydisabled, the StabiliTrak light comeson, and the STABILITRAK OFFmessage will appear on the DIC.Both traction control and StabiliTrakare automatically disabled in thiscondition.



Traction Control Operation

The traction control system ispart of the StabiliTrak system.Traction control limits wheel spinby reducing engine power to thewheels (engine speed management)and by applying brakes to eachindividual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started. It will activateand the StabiliTrak light will flashif it senses that any of the wheelsare spinning or beginning to losetraction while driving. If tractioncontrol is turned off, only thebrake-traction control portionof traction control will work.The engine speed managementwill be disabled. In this mode,engine power is not reducedautomatically and the drivenwheels can spin more freely.This can cause the brake-tractioncontrol to activate constantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spinthe wheel(s) excessively whilethese lights and messages aredisplayed.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roads orunder conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens,a reduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise control willautomatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑51.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines thata problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer for service.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.



Road SensingSuspensionThe Road SensingSuspension (RSS) featureprovides superior vehicle rideand handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.

The system is fully automaticand uses a computer controllerto continuously monitor vehiclespeed, wheel to body position,lift/dive and steering position ofthe vehicle. The controller thensends signals to each shockabsorber to independently adjustthe damping level to provide theoptimum vehicle ride.

RSS also interacts with the tow/haulmode that, when engaged, willprovide additional control of theshock absorbers. This additionalcontrol results in better ride andhandling characteristics when thevehicle is loaded or towing a trailer.See “Tow/Haul Mode” under TowingEquipment on page 9‑78.

Continuous DampingControl (CDC)This vehicle may have a continuousdamping control system calledAutoride® or MagneRide™. Withthis feature, improved vehicle rideand handling is provided under avariety of passenger and loadingconditions.

Autoride and MagneRide arefully automatic and use acomputer controller to continuouslymonitor vehicle speed, wheelto body position, lift/dive andsteering position of the vehicle.The controller then sends signalsto each shock absorber toindependently adjust the dampinglevel to provide the optimumvehicle ride.

Autoride and MagneRide alsointeract with the tow/haul modethat, when activated, will provideadditional control of the shockabsorbers. This additional controlresults in better ride and handlingcharacteristics when the vehicle isloaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Trailer Towing onpage 9‑74 for more information.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rearsuspension is available on light‐dutyvehicles and comes as a part of theContinuous Damping Control (CDC)suspension, if equipped.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.



An air compressor connected tothe rear shocks will raise or lowerthe rear of the vehicle to maintainproper vehicle height. The systemis activated when the ignition keyis turned to ON/RUN and willautomatically adjust vehicle heightthereafter. The system may exhaust(lower vehicle height) for up toten minutes after the ignition keyhas been turned off. You may hearthe air compressor operating whenthe height is being adjusted.

If a weight‐distributing hitch isbeing used, it is recommended toallow the shocks to inflate, therebyleveling the vehicle prior to adjustingthe hitch.

Cruise Control

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or morecan be maintained without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol is turned off.

This vehicle has a Hydra‐Matic6‐speed automatic transmission,see Grade Braking and CruiseGrade Braking under Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑43 for anexplanation of how cruise controlinteracts with the Range SelectionMode, tow/haul and grade brakingsystems.

This vehicle has StabiliTrak andwhen the system begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑47.When road conditions allow thecruise control to be safely usedagain, it can be turned back on.



Cruise Control Shown WithHeated Steering Wheel Button

(If Equipped)

The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

I (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator lightis on when cruise control is on andturns off when cruise control is off.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET − (Set/Coast): Press to setthe speed and activate cruisecontrol or make the vehicledecelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.

1. Press theI button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− button locatedon the steering wheel andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing theset speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed and staysthere.



Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the +RESbutton. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button on thesteering wheel briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed.When you take your foot off thepedal, the vehicle will slow downto the previous set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step onthe accelerator pedal to maintainthe vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruisecontrol is disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press [ on the steering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressI on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingtheI button or if the ignition isturned off.



Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph), and assists thedriver with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).The sensors on the rear bumperare used to detect the distance toan object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behindthe vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm(10 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

. Objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or too close or farfrom the vehicle

. Children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing, vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle's mirrors.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h).

An obstacle is indicated byaudible beeps. The intervalbetween the beeps becomesshorter as the vehicle gets closerto the obstacle. When the distanceis less than 30 cm (12 in) the beepsare continuous.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25.4 cm (10 in) off the groundand below liftgate level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.



The system can be disabled bypressing the rear park aid disablebutton located next to the radio.

The indicator light will come on andPARK ASSIST OFF displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) toindicate that URPA is off, see ObjectDetection System Messages onpage 5‑36.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If the URPA system will not activatedue to a temporary condition, themessages PARK ASSIST OFFor PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL will bedisplayed on the DIC.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicleto your dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF: This messageoccurs if the driver disables thesystem.

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see “Washing theVehicle” under Exterior Care onpage 10‑97.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message maynot clear until the frost or icehas melted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objectwas hanging out of the liftgateduring the last drive cycle. Oncethe attached object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

. Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck.

If the system is still disabled, afterdriving forward at least 40 km/h(25 mph), take the vehicle to yourdealer.



Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)The vehicle may have a Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system. Readthis entire section before using thesystem.

{ WARNING

SBZA is only a lane changingaid and does not replace drivervision. SBZA does not detect:

. Vehicles outside the sideblind zones which may berapidly approaching.

. Pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Failure to use proper care whenchanging lanes may result indamage to the vehicle, injury,or death. Always check theoutside and rearview mirrors,glance over your shoulder,and use the turn signal beforechanging lanes.

When the system detects a vehiclein the side blind zone, amber SBZAdisplays light up in the side mirrors.This indicates that it may be unsafeto change lanes. Before making alane change, always check theSBZA display, check the outsideand rearview mirrors, look over yourshoulder for vehicles and hazards,and use the turn signal.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, 3.5 m(11 ft). This zone starts at each sidemirror and goes back approximately5.0 m (16 ft). The height of thezone is approximately between0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) offthe ground.

Use caution while changing laneswhen towing a trailer, as the SBZAdetection zones do not changewhen a trailer is towed.



How the System Works

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror displays will brieflycome on to indicate that the systemis operating. When the vehicle ismoving forward, the left or right sidemirror SBZA display will light up ifa vehicle is detected in that blindzone. If the turn signal is activatedand a vehicle is also detected onthe same side, the SBZA display willflash to give you extra warning notto change lanes.

SBZA displays do not come onwhile the vehicle is approaching orpassing other vehicles. At speedsgreater then 32 km/h (20 mph),SBZA displays may come onwhen a vehicle you have passedremains in or drops back into thedetection zone.

SBZA can be disabled through theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑26 for more information.If the SBZA is disabled by thedriver, the SBZA mirror displays willnot light up during normal driving.

When the System Does Not SeemTo Work Properly

Occasional missed alerts canoccur under normal circumstancesand will increase in wet conditions.The system does not need to beserviced due to an occasionalmissed alert. The number of missedalerts will increase with increasedrainfall or road spray.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen the system is on and vehiclesare in the blind zone, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

SBZA is designed to ignorestationary objects; however, thesystem may occasionally light updue to guard rails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other stationary objects.This is normal system operation,the vehicle does not need service.

SBZA does not operate when theleft or right corners of the rearbumper are covered with mud,dirt, snow, ice, slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see “Washing theVehicle” under Exterior Care onpage 10‑97. If the DIC still displaysthe SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.UNAVAILABLE message aftercleaning the bumper, see yourdealer.



The SBZA displays may remain onif a trailer is attached to the vehicle,or a bicycle or object is extendingout to either side of the vehicle.

When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the driver will not be able toturn SBZA back on using the DIC.The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT ONoption will not be selectable if theconditions for normal systemoperation are not met. Until normaloperating conditions for SBZA aremet, you should not rely upon SBZAwhile driving.

SBZA Error Messages

The following messages mayappear in the DIC:

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFF: This messageindicates that the driver has turnedthe system off.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.UNAVAILABLE: This messageindicates that the SBZA system isdisabled either because the sensoris blocked and cannot detectvehicles in your blind zone, or thevehicle is passing through an openfield of view area, such as thedesert, where there is insufficientdata for operation. The sensor maybe blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,slush, or even heavy rainstorms.This message may also activateduring heavy rain or due to roadspray. The vehicle does not needservice. For cleaning, see “Washingthe Vehicle” under Exterior Care onpage 10‑97.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONEALERT SYSTEM: If this messageappears, both SBZA displays willremain on indicating there is aproblem with the SBZA system.If these displays remain on aftercontinued driving, the system needsservice. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

FCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Frequency of operation:24.05GHz – 24.25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than2.5V/m peak (0.25V/m average)at a distance of 3m

The manufacturer is notresponsible for any radio orTV interference caused byunauthorized modifications to thisequipment. Such modificationscould void the user's authorityto operate the equipment.



Rear VisionCamera (RVC)This vehicle may have a RearVision Camera system. Read thisentire section before using it.

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a viewof the area behind the vehicle.When the driver shifts the vehicleinto R (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on thenavigation screen. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back tothe last screen that had beendisplayed, after a delay.

Turning the Rear VisionCamera System On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the CONFIG hard keyto enter the configure menuoptions, then press the CONFIGhard key to select Display ortouch the Display screen button.

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

4. Select the Video screenbutton. When the Video screenbutton is highlighted the RVCsystem is on.



The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse) isapproximately 10 seconds.The delay can be cancelled byperforming one of the following:. Pressing a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shifting in to P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

11 km/h 7 mph.

There is a message on the rearvision camera screen that states“Check Surroundings for Safety.”

Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theCONFIG hard key while the rearvision camera image is on thedisplay. Any adjustments madewill only affect the rear visioncamera screen.

] (Brightness) : Touch the+ (plus) or – (minus) screen buttonsto increase or decrease thebrightness of the screen.

_ (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the contrastof the screen.

Symbols

The navigation system may havea feature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled andthe symbols have been turned on,the Rear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑54.

The symbols appear when an objecthas been detected by the URPAsystem. The symbol may cover theobject when viewing the navigationscreen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.

2. Shift into P (Park).

3. Press the CONFIG hard keyto enter the configure menuoptions, then press the CONFIGhard key repeatedly until Displayis selected or touch the Displayscreen button.

4. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button willbe highlighted when on.



Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

Rear Vision Camera SystemUnavailable: Displays when thesystem is not receiving information itrequires from other vehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you couldhit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle hasthe RVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.



Rear Vision Camera Location

The image is provided by thecamera located above the licenseplate.

The camera uses a special lens.The distance of the image thatappears on the screen differs fromthe actual distance. The areadisplayed by the camera is limited.The camera does not displayobjects which are close to eithercorner of the bumper or under thebumper. The area displayed onthe screen can vary accordingto vehicle orientation or roadconditions.

The following illustration showsthe field of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.



When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or displaya clear image if:. The RVC is turned off.

See “Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is inan accident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel



containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑66. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑64.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicles has the 6.0LV8 engine (VIN Code J), use regularunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If theoctane rating is less than 87, anaudible knocking noise, commonlyreferred to as spark knock, might beheard when driving. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher as soon as possible.If heavy knocking is heard whenusing gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code F), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher.You can also use regular unleadedgasoline rated at 87 octane or

higher, but the vehicle's accelerationcould be slightly reduced, and aslight audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard. If the octaneis less than 87, you might notice aheavy knocking noise when youdrive. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. Otherwise, youcould damage the engine. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑65 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards,it is designed to operate on fuelsthat meet California specifications.See the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United Statesor Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, allgasolines in the United Statesare now required to containadditives that help prevent engineand fuel system deposits fromforming, allowing the emissioncontrol system to work properly.In most cases, nothing should haveto be added to the fuel. However,some gasolines contain onlythe minimum amount of additiverequired to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors andintake valves clean, or if the vehicleexperiences problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pumpto ensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed by

the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be foundat www.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, addedto the fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intakevalves. GM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS is the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol,and reformulated gasolinesmight be available in your area.We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.



However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT);ask the attendant where you buygasoline whether the fuel containsMMT. We recommend againstthe use of such gasolines. Fuelscontaining MMT can reduce the lifeof spark plugs and the performanceof the emission control systemcould be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp might turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer forservice.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑64.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.



Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Departmentof Energy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations thatdo have E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798.By definition, this means that fuellabeled E85 will have an ethanolcontent between 70% and 85%.Filling the fuel tank with fuelmixtures that do not meet ASTMspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

To ensure quick starts in thewintertime, the E85 fuel must beformulated properly for your climateaccording to ASTM specificationD 5798. If you have trouble startingon E85, it could be because theE85 fuel is not properly formulatedfor your climate. If this happens,switching to gasoline or addinggasoline to the fuel tank canimprove starting. For good startingand heater efficiency below 0°C(32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tankshould contain no more than 70%ethanol. It is best not to alternaterepeatedly between gasoline andE85. If you do switch fuels, it isrecommended that you add asmuch fuel as possible — do notadd less than 11 L (three gallons)when refueling. You should drive thevehicle immediately after refuelingfor at least 11 km (seven miles) toallow the vehicle to adapt to thechange in ethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑68.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle. If thevehicle has E85 fuel capability, thefuel cap will be yellow and statethat E85 or gasoline can be used.See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑66.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.



{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stop.Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and waita few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible.See “Washing the Vehicle” inExterior Care .

When replacing the fuel cap,insert the tether in its hole beforetightening the cap. Turn the fuel capclockwise until it clicks. It will requiremore effort to turn the fuel cap onthe last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑18.

If the vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC), theTIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays if the fuel cap is notproperly installed.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it maynot fit properly. This may causethe malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment thathas been designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving

while towing a trailer, see“Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”



For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑94. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑94.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many different laws,

including speed limit restrictions,having to do with trailering.Make sure the rig will be legal,not only where you live but alsowhere you will be driving.

. Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” later in thissection.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles)the new vehicle is driven.The engine, axle or otherparts could be damaged.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loadsand/or hilly conditions.

. If the vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system andit doesn't seem to be workingproperly while pulling a trailer,turn the system off. See SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9‑56 for more information.

Important considerations that haveto do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The weight on the vehicle's tires. And the weight of the trailering

combination



Driving with a Trailer

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rearof the vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

To maximize safety when towinga trailer:

. Have the exhaust systeminspected for leaks and makenecessary repairs beforestarting a trip.

. Never drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑38.

Towing a trailer requires acertain amount of experience.The combination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,

tires and mirrors. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start thecombination moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance isneeded when towing a trailer.The combination will not accelerateas quickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.



Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, tomove the trailer to the left, movethat hand to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your handto the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact withthe vehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do thisso the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentpanel will still flash for turns. It is

important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down,the brakes might get hot and nolonger work well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

The tow/haul mode may be usedif the transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑43.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar to

engine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑22.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, butdo not shift into P (Park) yet.Turn the wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.



2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehiclecan roll.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the engine has been leftrunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure the vehiclewill not move, even when on fairlylevel ground, always put the shiftlever fully in P (Park) with theparking brake firmly set.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs servicemore often when pulling a trailer.See the Maintenance Schedulefor more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Do not tow a trailer during break‐in.See New Vehicle Break-In onpage 9‑30 for more information.



{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer istoo heavy, the brakes maynot work well— or even at all.The driver and passengers couldbe seriously injured. The vehiclemay also be damaged; theresulting repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by the vehicle

warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice inthis section and see your dealerfor important information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has tobe used properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pullinga trailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature and how muchthe vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. It can dependon any special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section for more information.

Trailer weight rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas only the driver but all requiredtrailering equipment. Weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted fromthe trailer weight rating.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Escalade 2WD 6.2LV8 3.42 3 765 kg (8,300 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

Escalade AWD 6.2LV8 3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

Escalade ESV 2WD 6.2LV8 3.42 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

Escalade ESV AWD 6.2LV8 3.42 3 493 kg (7,700 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating™(GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of anytrailer is very important becauseit is also part of the vehicle weight.The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongue

weight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers and cargo in the vehiclereduce the amount of tongue weightthe vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑24 for more informationabout the vehicle's maximum loadcapacity.



Trailer tongue weight (A) should be10 percent to 15 percent and fifthwheel or gooseneck kingpin weightshould be 15 to 25 percent of theloaded trailer weight (B) up to themaximums for vehicle series andhitch type shown below:

Vehicle SeriesHitch Type Maximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lbs)

1500 Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lbs)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue or kingpin weightcannot cause the vehicle to exceed

the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) or the RGAWR (Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating). See “TotalWeight on the Vehicle's Tires” laterin this section for more information.

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.



Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification labelon the driver door or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑24 for moreinformation. Make sure not toexceed the GVWR limit for thevehicle, or the RGAWR, with thetow vehicle and trailer fully loadedfor the trip including the weight ofthe trailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, make sure not toexceed the RGAWR before applyingthe weight distribution spring bars.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailerdoes not exceed any of its weightratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Trailer Weight Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sureit is not exceeding any of theseratings is to weigh the tow vehicleand trailer combination, fully loadedfor the trip, getting individualweights for each of these items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control.Most small-to-medium trailers canbe towed with a weight carryinghitch which simply features a

coupler latched to the hitch ball.Larger trailers may require a weightdistributing hitch that uses springbars to distribute the trailer tongueweight among the two vehicle andtrailer axles. See “Weight of theTrailer Tongue” in Trailer Towing onpage 9‑74 for rating limits withvarious hitch types.

If a step-bumper hitch will be used,the bumper could be damagedin sharp turns. Make sure thereis ample room when turning toavoid contact between the trailerand the bumper.

Consider using sway controlswith any trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controlsor refer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.



Weight‐Distributing HitchAdjustment

A. Body to Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the spring bars should beadjusted so the distance (A) is thesame after coupling the trailer to thetow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.

Hitch Cover

The vehicle may have a hitch cover.To remove the hitch cover:

1. Turn the fasteners onthe lower tabs 90 degreescounterclockwise.

2. Lift the lower edge of the coverabout 45 degrees.

3. Pull the cover downwardto disengage the upperattachments.

To reinstall the hitch cover:

1. Hold the cover at a 45 degreeangle to the vehicle and pushthe upper tabs in the hitch coverinto the chrome slots in thefascia.

2. Move the bottom of the coverforward until the lower tabs lineup with the lower fascia slots.

3. Snap the hitch cover into placeby pushing the upper cornersforward.

4. Turn the fasteners on the lowertabs 90 degrees clockwise tolock the cover in place.



Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the roadif it becomes separated from thehitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by thehitch manufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Safety chains shouldbe attached to holes on the trailerhitch platform. Always leave justenough slack so the combinationcan turn. Never allow safety chainsto drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system thatis adequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Since the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak, the trailer brakes cannottap into the vehicle's hydraulicsystem.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring HarnessPackage

The vehicle has a seven-pinuniversal heavy-duty trailerconnector attached to therear bumper beam next tothe integrated trailer hitch.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. White: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red: Battery Feed*. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuitsare installed in the underhoodelectrical center, but the wires arenot connected. They should beconnected by your dealer or aqualified service center.

If charging a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the tow/haul modebutton located at the end of theshift lever. This will boost thevehicle system voltage andproperly charge the battery.



If the trailer is too light for tow/haulmode, turn on the headlamps as asecond way to boost the vehiclesystem and charge the battery.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller. The instrument panelcontains blunt cut wires near thedata link connector for the trailerbrake controller. The harnesscontains the following wires:. Dark Blue: Brake Signal to

Trailer Connector. Red/Black: Battery. Light Blue/White: Brake Switch. White: Ground

It should be installed by your dealeror a qualified service center.

Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off thetow/haul mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when thetow/haul mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑43 for moreinformation.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” in TrailerTowing on page 9‑74. Tow/Haul ismost useful under the followingdriving conditions:. When pulling a heavy trailer or

a large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop andgo traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer ora large or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.



Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with notrailer at all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit tothe selection of Tow/Haul whenthe vehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded mayresult in unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑52 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑53.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-22Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-25Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-33Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-35

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-36

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-39High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-41Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-52Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64


10-2 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-71Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Secondary Latch System . . . 10-86Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-88

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-94Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105

General InformationFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.


Vehicle Care 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries containedin remote keyless transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessoriesto the vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is not

covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealerand ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuineGM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑53.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService WorkIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English andmetric fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑15.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3‑54.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 11‑10.


Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located inside thevehicle to the lower left of thesteering wheel. 2. Then go to the front of the

vehicle and locate the secondaryhood release, near the center ofthe grille.

3. Push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

4. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then bring the hood from fullopen to within 152 mm (6 in)from the closed position, pause,then push the front center of thehood with a swift, firm motion tofully close the hood.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

6.2 L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑16.

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑18.

C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑89.

D. Battery on page 10‑30.

E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 10‑89.

F. Automatic TransmissionDipstick (Out of View). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑12.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10‑7.

I. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑18.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑25.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brake Fluid onpage 10‑28.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑43.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

If the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life,careful attention must be paidto engine oil. Following thesesimple, but important steps willhelp protect your investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification andof the proper viscosity grade.See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil.”

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil.”


10-8 Vehicle Care

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑11.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do WithUsed Oil.”

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In orderto get an accurate reading, thevehicle must be on level ground.The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location ofthe engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking your oil level too soonafter engine shut off will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, addone liter/quart of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level.See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”for an explanation of what kind ofoil to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e. the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit yourdriving of the vehicle and seek aservice professional to removethe excess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils withthe dexos™ certification mark.Oils meeting the requirementsof your vehicle should have thedexos™ certification mark on thecontainer. This certification markindicates that the oil has beenapproved to the dexos™specification.

Your vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos™ approved engine oil.

Notice: Use only engine oilthat is approved to the dexos™specification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexos™specification will show thedexos™ symbol on the container.Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. If youare unsure whether your oilis approved to the dexos™specification, ask your serviceprovider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos™ is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos™ approved engine oilis not available at an oil changeor for maintaining proper oil level,you may use substitute engine oildisplaying the API Starburst symboland of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Use of oils that do not meet thedexos™ specification, however, mayresult in reduced performance undercertain circumstances.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do notuse other viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation:In an area of extreme cold,where the temperature fallsbelow −29°C (−20°F), anSAE 0W-30 oil should be used.An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold startingfor the engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, be sure to alwaysselect an oil that meets therequired specification, dexos™.See “Specification” for moreinformation.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thedexos™ specification and displayingthe dexos™ certification markare all that is needed for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all theoil from the filter before disposal.Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash or pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Recycle it bytaking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑34.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 miles).


10-12 Vehicle Care

It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will performthis work and reset the system.It is also important to check theoil regularly over the course of anoil drain interval and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always resetthe engine oil life to 100% afterevery oil change. It will not resetitself. To reset the system:

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary tocheck the transmission fluid level.The only reason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatingthe transmission. If a small leak issuspected, then use the followingchecking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is alarge leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to adealer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑7.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmissionto overheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checkingthe transmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface.Keep the engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, move theshift lever back to P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle(500 – 800 rpm) for at leastone minute. Slowly releasethe brake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andpress the Trip/Fuel button ortrip odometer reset stem untilTRANS TEMP (TransmissionTemperature) displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).

6. Using the TRANS TEMPreading, determine andperform the appropriate checkprocedure. If the TRANS TEMPreading is not within the requiredtemperature ranges, allow thevehicle to cool, or operate thevehicle until the appropriatetransmission fluid temperatureis reached.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as areference to determine if thetransmission has enough fluidto be operated safely until a hotcheck procedure can be made.The hot check procedure is themost accurate method to check thefluid level. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedureto check fluid level when thetransmission temperature isbetween 27°C and 32°C(80°F and 90°F).

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 formore information.

2. Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushingit back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and thenpull it back out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLDband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pint). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check atthe first opportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperatureis between 71°C and 93°C(160°F and 200°F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level.The hot check should be performedat the first opportunity in order toverify the cold check. The fluid levelrises as fluid temperature increases,so it is important to ensure thetransmission temperature is withinrange.

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 formore information.

2. Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushingit back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and then pullit back out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. Safe operating level is within theHOT cross hatch band on thedipstick. If the fluid level is notwithin the HOT band, and thetransmission temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C (160°Fand 200°F), add or drain fluid asnecessary to bring the level intothe HOT band. If the fluid levelis low, add only enough fluidto bring the level into the HOTband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pint). Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level atleast twice using the proceduresdescribed. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If fluid is added,it may take 15 minutes or longerto obtain an accurate readingbecause of residual fluiddraining down the dipstick tube.If inconsistent readings persist,check the transmission breather tobe sure it is clean and not clogged.If readings are still inconsistent,contact your dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

Inspect the air cleaner/filter atthe scheduled maintenanceintervals and replace it at thefirst oil change after each80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.If driving on dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by followingSteps 1 through 6. When the engineair cleaner/filter is removed, lightlyshake it to release loose dust anddirt. If the engine air cleaner/filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required. Never use compressedair to clean the filter.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Replacing the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

2. Loosen the four screws on thecover of the housing and lift upthe cover.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Careshould be taken to dislodgeas little dirt as possible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tightenthe screws.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.


10-18 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Coolant Surge Tank

B. Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)(Out of View)

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if thereis a leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant otherthan DEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22.


Vehicle Care 10-19

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle's coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning.The engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection upto 129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitorsand/or additives are used inthe vehicle's cooling system,the vehicle could be damaged.Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 for moreinformation.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.


10-20 Vehicle Care

The coolant surge tank is locatedin the engine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for more informationon location.

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, the vehicle may have a leak inthe cooling system.

How to Add Coolant to theSurge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if youturn the surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.


Vehicle Care 10-21

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant as follows:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tankwith the proper mixture to theFULL COLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can befelt getting hot. Watch out forthe engine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reachesthe FULL COLD mark.


10-22 Vehicle Care

5. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

6. Verify coolant level after engineis shut off and the coolant iscold. If necessary, repeat coolantfill procedure Steps 1 through 6.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge on your vehicle's instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑14.

In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE, ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, anda ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDmessage comes on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) on theinstrument panel. See EngineCooling System Messages onpage 5‑33 and Engine PowerMessages on page 5‑34.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway. See Roadside Service(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7or Roadside Service (Mexico) onpage 13‑10.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. See OverheatedEngine Protection OperatingMode on page 10‑25 forinformation on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant, thevehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑25 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steamor coolant before you openthe hood.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badlyburned. Stop the engine if itoverheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑25 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.


10-24 Vehicle Care

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but see or hear no steam,the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when the vehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer. See Trailer

Towing on page 9‑74.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windowsas necessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park)or N (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine conditionexists and the ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED message is displayed,an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage.In this mode, a loss in power andengine performance will be noticed.This operating mode allows thevehicle to be driven to a safe placein an emergency. Driving extendeddistances and/or towing a trailerin the overheat protection modeshould be avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severely

degraded. Repair the causeof coolant loss, change the oiland reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Engine FanThe vehicle has electric coolingfans. The fans spinning at lowspeed during most everyday drivingmight be heard. The fans can turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,and/or high outside temperatures,or if operating the air conditioningsystem, the fans can change to highspeed and an increase in fan noisemight be heard. This is normal andindicates that the cooling systemis functioning properly. The fanschange to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.


10-26 Vehicle Care

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at theFULL COLD mark. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring thelevel up to the mark.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature mayfall below freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comeson when the washer fluid is low.The message is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. Thisallows for fluid expansionif freezing occurs, whichcould damage the tank ifit is completely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applyingthe brake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be asign that brake service mightbe required.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the frontand rear brakes — for the worse.The braking performance expectedcan change in many other ways ifthe wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons whythe brake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too muchfluid when new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned,and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brakehydraulic system. See “CheckingBrake Fluid” in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑21.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brakefluid from a sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.This helps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system,the brakes might not work well.This could cause a crash. Alwaysuse the proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts.For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in thebrake hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately.


10-30 Vehicle Care

BatteryIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Refer to the replacement numberon the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑89 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

If the vehicle is equipped withAll-Wheel Drive, be sure to performthe lubricant checks described inthis section.

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 to determine how often tocheck the lubricant.


Vehicle Care 10-31

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

A. Drain Plug

B. Fill Plug

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole. Use carenot to overtighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless thereis a leak suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.


To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug. When the differential is cold,

add enough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fill plug hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the fillplug hole.


10-32 Vehicle Care

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless thereis a leak suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certain

level. When checking the fluidlevel on any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveledout along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sumparea. Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour ortwo. Remember that the rear axleassembly must be supported to geta true reading.


To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.. For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles,

the proper level is from 15mmto 40 mm (0.6 in to 1.6 in) belowthe bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.


Vehicle Care 10-33

. For All-Wheel-Drive vehicles, theproper level is from 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.75 in)below the bottom of the fillerplug hole, located on the rearaxle. Add only enough fluid toreach the proper level.

What to Use


Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑46.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It shouldbe parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑46.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades shouldbe inspected for wear or cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

1. Pull the windshield wiper armconnector away from thewindshield.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas oneach side of the blade, and turnthe blade assembly away fromthe arm connector.


10-36 Vehicle Care

3. Install the new blade onto thearm connector and make surethe grooved areas are fully set inthe locked position.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

1. Lift the wiper blade assembly upand out of the park rest position.

2. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.The backglass wiper blade willnot lock in a vertical position,so care should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

3. Turn the wiper blade assembly,and pull it off of the wiper arm.Hold the wiper arm in positionand push the blade away fromthe wiper arm.

4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assemblyto the park rest position.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front sideglass must be replaced, see yourdealer to determine the correctreplacement glass.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual opticalheadlamp aiming system. The aimof the headlamps have been presetat the factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their highbeams at you, this may mean thevertical aim of the headlamps needsto be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicleis taken to your dealer for service ifthe headlamps need to be adjusted.It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described.

The vehicle should:. Be placed so the headlamps are

7.6 m (25 ft.) from a light coloredwall or other flat surface.

. Have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the wayto the wall or other flat surface.

. Be placed so it is perpendicularto the wall or other flat surface.

. Not have any snow, ice, or mudon it.

. Be fully assembled and all otherwork stopped while headlampaiming is being performed.

. Be normally loaded with a fulltank of fuel and one person or75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on thedriver seat.

. Have the tires properly inflated.

. Have the spare tire is in itsproper location in the vehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5 for more information.

2. Locate the center of theprojector lens of the low‐beamheadlamp.


10-38 Vehicle Care

3. Record the distance from theground to the center of theprojector lens of the low‐beamheadlamp.

4. At a wall, measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a pieceof cardboard or equivalent infront of the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.


Vehicle Care 10-39

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lampon the right (B) shows theincorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑41.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The low beam high intensitydischarge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage.If you try to service any of thesystem components, you couldbe seriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

The vehicle may have HIDheadlamps. After an HID headlampbulb has been replaced, you maynotice that the beam is a slightlydifferent shade than it was originally.This is normal.

LED LightingThe vehicle may have LEDheadlamps. For replacement ofthe LED lighting assembly contactyour dealer.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Back-Up LampsTo replace this bulb:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 2‑9 or Liftgate(Power) on page 2‑10 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

3. Pull the taillamp assemblyrearward until the inner pinson the taillamp assemblydisengage from the vehicle.

4. Press the release tab, if the bulbsocket has one, and turn thesocket counterclockwise toremove it from the taillampassembly.

5. Pull the old bulb straight outfrom the socket.

6. Press a new bulb into thesocket, insert the socket intothe taillamp assembly and turnthe socket clockwise into thetaillamp assembly until it clicks.

7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.When reinstalling, make sure toline up the pins on the taillampassembly with the vehicle. If thepins do not line up correctly, thetaillamp assembly will not beable to be installed properly.

If the taillamp, stoplamp, or turnsignal need to be replaced, see yourdealer for service.


Vehicle Care 10-41

License Plate Lamp

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the molding that is part of theliftgate.

2. Twist and pull the license platelamp assembly forward throughthe molding opening.

3. Remove the bulb socket fromthe lamp assembly by turning itcounterclockwise. Pull the bulbstraight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 2 toreinstall the license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-up Lamp 7441

LicensePlate Lamp

168LL(W5WLL)

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical loadis too heavy, the circuit breakeropens and closes, protecting thecircuit until the current load returnsto normal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.

Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snowor ice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

The wiring circuits in the vehicleare protected from short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on theroad and don't have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you canget along without – like the radioor cigarette lighter – and use itsfuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

The Engine Compartment FuseBlock is located in the enginecompartment, on the driver sideof the vehicle. Lift the cover foraccess to the fuse/relay block.


Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.


10-44 Vehicle Care


Vehicle Care 10-45

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Right TrailerStop/Turn Lamp

2

Electronic StabilitySuspension Control,Automatic LevelControl Exhaust

3Left TrailerStop/Turn Lamp

4 Engine Controls

5Engine ControlModule, ThrottleControl

6Trailer BrakeController

7 Front Washer

8 Oxygen Sensors

9Antilock BrakesSystem 2

Fuses Usage

10 Trailer Back-upLamps

11Driver SideLow-Beam Headlamp

12Engine ControlModule (Battery)

13Fuel Injectors, IgnitionCoils (Right Side)

14Transmission ControlModule (Battery)

15Vehicle Back-upLamps

16Passenger SideLow-Beam Headlamp

17Air ConditioningCompressor

18 Oxygen Sensors

19Transmission Controls(Ignition)

20 Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

21 Fuel System ControlModule

22 Headlamp Washer

23Rear WindshieldWasher

24Fuel Injectors, IgnitionCoils (Left Side)

25 Trailer Park Lamps

26Driver Side ParkLamps

27Passenger Side ParkLamps

28 Fog Lamps

29 Horn

30Passenger SideHigh-Beam Headlamp

31Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)(If Equipped)

32Driver SideHigh-Beam Headlamp


10-46 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

33 Daytime RunningLamps 2 (If Equipped)

34 Sunroof

35Key Ignition System,Theft DeterrentSystem

36 Windshield Wiper

37SEO B2 UpfitterUsage (Battery)

38Electric AdjustablePedals

39 Climate Controls(Battery)

40Airbag System(Ignition)

41 Amplifier

42 Audio System

43Miscellaneous(Ignition), CruiseControl

Fuses Usage

44 Liftgate Release

45Airbag System(Battery)

46Instrument PanelCluster

47 Not Used

48Auxiliary ClimateControl (Ignition)

49Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

50 Rear Defogger

51 Heated Mirrors

52SEO B1 UpfitterUsage (Battery)

53Cigarette Lighter,Auxiliary Power Outlet

54Automatic LevelControl CompressorRelay

Fuses Usage

55 Climate Controls(Ignition)

56Engine ControlModule, SecondaryFuel Pump (Ignition)

J-CaseFuses

Usage

57 Cooling Fan 1

58Automatic LevelControl Compressor

59Heavy Duty AntilockBraking System

60 Cooling Fan 2

61Antilock BrakeSystem 1

62 Starter

63Stud 2 (TrailerBrakes)

64Left Bussed ElectricalCenter 1


Vehicle Care 10-47

J-CaseFuses

Usage

65Electric RunningBoards

66Heated WindshieldWasher System

67 Transfer Case

68Stud 1 (TrailerConnector BatteryPower)

69Mid-Bussed ElectricalCenter 1

70 Climate ControlBlower

71Power LiftgateModule

72Left Bussed ElectricalCenter 2

Relays Usage

FAN HI Cooling Fan HighSpeed

FAN LOCooling Fan LowSpeed

FANCNTRL

Cooling Fan Control

HDLPLO/HID

Low-Beam Headlamp

FOGLAMP

Front Fog Lamps

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

STRTR Starter

PWR/TRN Powertrain

FUELPMP Fuel Pump

PRKLAMP

Parking Lamps

Relays Usage

REARDEFOG

Rear Defogger

RUN/CRNK

Switched Power

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is located on the driverside edge of the instrument panel.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Rear Seats

2Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

3 Steering WheelControls Backlight

Fuses Usage

4 Driver Door Module

5Dome Lamps, DriverSide Turn Signal

6Driver Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp

7Instrument PanelBack Lighting

8Passenger Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp

9Passenger DoorModule, Driver Unlock

10 Power Door Lock 2(Unlock Feature)

11Power Door Lock 2(Lock Feature)

12Stoplamps, CenterHigh‐ MountedStoplamp

13 Rear Climate Controls

14 Power Mirror


Vehicle Care 10-49

Fuses Usage

15 Body ControlModule (BCM)

16Accessory PowerOutlets

17 Interior Lamps

18Power Door Lock 1(Unlock Feature)

19Rear SeatEntertainment

20Ultrasonic RearParking Assist,Power Liftgate

Fuses Usage

21 Power Door Lock 1(Lock Feature)

22Driver InformationCenter (DIC)

23 Rear Wiper

24 Cooled Seats

25Driver Seat Module,Remote Keyless EntrySystem

26Driver Power DoorLock (Unlock Feature)

CircuitBreaker

Usage

LT DRDriver Side PowerWindow CircuitBreaker

HarnessConnector Usage

LT DRDriver DoorHarnessConnection

BODY Harness Connector

BODY Harness Connector

Center Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The center instrument panel fuseblock is located underneath theinstrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Top View


BODY 2Body HarnessConnector 2



HEADLINER3

Headliner HarnessConnector 3


HEADLINER2


HEADLINER1


SEO/UPFITTER

Special EquipmentOption UpfitterHarness Connector

CircuitBreaker Usage

CB1Passenger SidePower Window CircuitBreaker

CB2Passenger SeatCircuit Breaker

CB3Driver Seat CircuitBreaker

CB4 Rear Sliding Window

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details.For additional information referto the tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have a blowout and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑24.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-51

WARNING (Continued)

. Under inflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenyour tires are cold.

. Over inflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If your tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only yourdealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation on page 10‑58 forinflation pressure adjustmentfor high speed driving.

22‐Inch Tires

If your vehicle has the optional22‐inch P285/45R22 size tires,they are classified as touringtires and are designed foron‐road use. The low‐profile,

wide tread design is notrecommended for off‐roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving onpage 9‑7, for additionalinformation.

Notice: If the vehicle haslow‐profile tires, they are moresusceptible to damage fromroad hazards or curb impactthan standard profile tires.Tire and/or wheel assemblydamage can occur whencoming into contact withroad hazards like, potholes,or sharp edged objects,or when sliding into a curb.The vehicle warranty doesnot cover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tireis molded into the sidewall.The following illustration is anexample of a typical P‐Metrictire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Departmentof Transportation):The Department ofTransportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.


Vehicle Care 10-53

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based onthree performance factors:treadwear, traction, andtemperature resistance.For more information, seeUniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 10‑69.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑57 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑24.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following examples showthe different parts of a tire size.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S.Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tiresection width in millimetersfrom sidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shownin item C of the light truck(LT‐Metric) tire illustration,it would mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75% as high as itis wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.


10-54 Vehicle Care

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weightof optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the plies are laidat alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑57.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.


Vehicle Care 10-55

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall ofa tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑24.

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑24.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑24.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑24.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side thatfaces outward when mountedon a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑24.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across thetread of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑65.

UTQGS (Uniform TireQuality Grading Standards):A tire information system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are moldedinto the sidewall of the tire.See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑69.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑24.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑24.

Tire PressureIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Tires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under‐inflation orover‐inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under‐inflation),you can get the following:. Tire overloading andover-heating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

If your tires have too much air(over‐inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information labelis attached to your vehicle.This label shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑24.How you load your vehicleaffects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load yourvehicle with more weight thanit was designed to carry.


10-58 Vehicle Care

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget to check thepressure of the spare tire.SeeFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10‑88 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are underinflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label,no further adjustment isnecessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks bykeeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds,160 km/h (100mph) or higher,puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustmentfor high speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.


Vehicle Care 10-59

If your vehicle has P265/65R18 orP285/45R22 size tires and you willbe driving at high speeds, speeds of100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, setthe cold inflation pressure to 3 psi(20 kPa) above the recommendedtire pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information Label. Whenyou end this high‐speed driving,return the tires to the cold inflationpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑24and Tire Pressure on page 10‑57.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated to

the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correcttire pressure, even if under‐inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires or


10-60 Vehicle Care

wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑60 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

This vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle's tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster. If the warning light comeson, stop as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑24.


Vehicle Care 10-61

At the same time a message tocheck the pressure in a specific tireappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. The low tirepressure warning light and theDIC warning message come onat each ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed bythe driver. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑26 and TireMessages on page 5‑39.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for your

vehicle's tires when they arecold. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑24, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57.

Your vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑64, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑64 and Tires onpage 10‑50.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealeror included in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stayson for the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not havea TPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off onceyou re‐install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.


10-62 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully.See “TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged.The DIC message and theTPMS malfunction light shouldgo off when the TPMS sensorsare installed and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealerfor service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑66.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer forservice if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time yourotate your vehicle's tires or replaceone or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matchedto the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. If increasing thetire's air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall.


Vehicle Care 10-63

To decrease air-pressure out of atire you can use the pointed end ofthe valve cap, a pencil-style airpressure gauge, or a key.

You have two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger than two minutes, to matchthe first tire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press Q and K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter at the same timefor approximately five seconds.The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire's airpressure for five seconds,or until a horn chirp sounds.The horn chirp, which maytake up to 30 seconds tosound, confirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheelposition.

6. Proceed to the passengerside front tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passengerside rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage at least oncea month.

Always remove the tires if anyof the following statementsare true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cordor fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 miles).See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.

See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑65 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑71.

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


Vehicle Care 10-65

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures asshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑57and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑24.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑60.

Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could come

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

off and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑73.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Some commercial truck tires maynot have treadwear indicators.See Tire Inspection on page 10‑64and Tire Rotation on page 10‑64for additional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This is also true for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnot being used. Multiple conditionsaffect how fast this aging takesplace, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. Tires willtypically need to be replaced dueto wear before they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle.Park a vehicle that will be storedfor at least a month in a cool, dry,clean area away from direct sunlightto slow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended periodcan cause flat spots on the tiresthat may result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tiresor raise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when itwas new, were designed to meetGeneral Motors Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating.This way, your vehicle will continueto have tires that are designed togive the same performance andvehicle safety, during normal use,as the original tires.


Vehicle Care 10-67

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of yourvehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM's TPCSpec number is molded onto thetire's sidewall near the tire size.If the tires have an all‐seasontread design, the TPC spec numberwill be followed by an MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑52 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing tires insets of four. This is because uniformtread depth on all tires will helpkeep your vehicle performing mostlike it did when the tires were new.Replacing less than a full set oftires can affect the braking andhandling performance of yourvehicle. See Tire Inspection onpage 10‑64 and Tire Rotation onpage 10‑64 for information onproper tire rotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. You or otherscould be injured or killed if youattempt to mount or dismounta tire. Only your dealer or anauthorized tire service centershould mount and dismount thetires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause you tolose control while driving. If youmix tires of different sizes,brands, or types (radial andbias-belted tires), the vehiclemight not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Usingtires of different sizes, brands,or types could also cause

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

damage to your vehicle. Be sureto use the same size, brand, andtype of tires on all wheels.

Your vehicle may have a differentsize spare than the road tires(those originally installed on yourvehicle). When new, your vehicleincluded a spare tire and wheelassembly with a similar overalldiameter as your vehicle's roadtires and wheels, so it is all rightto drive on it. Because this sparewas developed for use on yourvehicle, it will not affect vehiclehandling.


10-68 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle'stires with those that do not have aTPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type(radial and bias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system may give aninaccurate low‐pressure warningif non‐TPC Spec-rated tires areinstalled on your vehicle. Non‐TPCSpec-rated tires may give alow‐pressure warning that is higheror lower than the proper warninglevel you would get with TPCSpec-rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 10‑59.

Your vehicle's original equipmenttires are listed on the Tireand Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑24 for more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its locationon your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that area different size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.


Vehicle Care 10-69

{ WARNING

If you add different sized wheels,your vehicle may not providean acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tiresnot recommended for thosewheels are selected. You mayincrease the chance that you willcrash and suffer serious injury.Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for yourvehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑66 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance.This applies only to vehiclessold in the United States.The grades are molded on thesidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality

Grading (UTQG) systemdoes not apply to deeptread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and ahalf (1½) times as well onthe government course asa tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop onwet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditionson specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum


Vehicle Care 10-71

required by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tireis established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it,except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired.See your dealer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel you need.

Each new wheel should havethe same load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control.You could have a collision inwhich you or others could beinjured. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑73 for more information.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been usedor how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and causea crash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause you tolose control of the vehicle andyou or others may be injuredin a crash. Use another type of

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it foruse on the vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions.Follow that manufacturer'sinstructions. To help avoiddamage to the vehicle, driveslowly, re‐adjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thewheels. If you do find tractiondevices that will fit, install themon the rear tires.


Vehicle Care 10-73

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire,it is much more likely to leak outslowly. But if you should ever havea blowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and gripthe steering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunder-inflated or flat may causea blowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely under-inflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soonas possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.



10-74 Vehicle Care

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑8.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people.You and they could be badlyinjured or even killed. Find a levelplace to change your tire. To helpprevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be even more certain thevehicle will not move, you shouldput blocks at the front and rear ofthe tire farthest away from theone being changed. That wouldbe the tire on the other side, atthe opposite end of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment you will need isstored under the storage tray, whichis located on the driver side trimpanel (over the rear wheelhouse).

Regular Wheelbase shown,Extended Wheelbase similar.

1. Remove the tray to access thetools by pulling up on the fingerdepression under the jacksymbol.

2. Remove the wing nut (B) used toretain the tool bag by turning itcounterclockwise.

3. Turn the knob (A) on the jackcounterclockwise to release thejack and wheel blocks from thebracket.

4. Remove the wheel blocks andthe wheel block retainer byturning the wing nut (C)counterclockwise.

The tools you will be using includethe following:

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Jack Handle

D. Jack Handle Extensions

E. Wheel Wrench


10-76 Vehicle Care

To access the spare tire:

A. Hoist Assembly

B. Hoist Shaft

C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole


E. Wheel Wrench

F. Hoist Cable

G. Tire/Wheel Retainer

H. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

J. Hoist End of Extension Tool

K. Spare Tire Lock

1. To reach the hoist shaft accesscover (C), you will first need toremove the hitch cover. Removeit by turning the two fastenerslocated at the bottom of thecover counterclockwise and thenpull the cover down and rotatetowards you.

2. Open the hoist shaft accesscover (C) on the bumper toaccess the spare tire lock (K).

3. To remove the spare tire lockinsert the ignition key, turn itclockwise and then pull thelock out.

4. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (D) and wheelwrench (E) as shown.


Vehicle Care 10-77

5. Insert the open end of theextension (J) through the hole inthe rear bumper (I) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

Be sure the hoist end (J) ofthe extension (D) connects tothe hoist shaft (B). The ribbedsquare end of the extension isused to lower the spare tire.

6. Turn the wheel wrench (E)counterclockwise to lower thespare tire (H) to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

If the spare tire does not lower tothe ground, the secondary latchis engaged causing the tire notto lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 10‑86 for moreinformation. 7. Use the wheel wrench hook

that allows you to pull the hoistcable towards you, to assist inreaching the spare tire.


10-78 Vehicle Care

8. Tilt the tire toward thevehicle with some slack inthe cable to access the tire/wheel retainer (G). Separatethe retainer from the guide pinby sliding the retainer up thepin while pressing down on thelatch.

Once the retainer is separatedfrom the pin, tilt the retainer andpull it through the center of thewheel along with the cable andlatch.

9. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑73 for moreinformation.

2. To remove the center cap, placethe chiseled end of the wheelwrench in the slot on the wheeland gently pry the cap out.


Vehicle Care 10-79

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto loosen the wheel nuts. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

A. Front Position

B. Rear Position

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

4. Position the jack under thevehicle as shown.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Front Position

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tireis on a front tire of the vehicle,you will need to use the jackhandle and only one jack handleextension. Attach the wheelwrench to the jack handleextension. Attach the jackhandle to the jack (A). Positionthe jack on the frame behind theflat tire where the frame sectionsoverlap. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.

Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clearthe ground.

Rear Position

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tireis on a rear tire of the vehicle,you will need to use the jackhandle (B) and both jack handleextensions (C). Attach the wheelwrench (D) to the jack handleextensions (C). Attach the jackhandle (B) to the jack (A).

Use the jacking pad (E) providedon the rear axle. Turn the wheelwrench (D) clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so thereis enough room for the spare tireto clear the ground.

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-81

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑73.

7. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

8. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel after mountingthe spare tire.

9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand.Then use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts until the wheel isheld against the hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lowerthe vehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.


10-82 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nutsin the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

11. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

When you reinstall the regularwheel and tire, you must alsoreinstall the center cap. Line thetab on the back of the cap with theslot in the wheel. Place the cap onthe wheel and press until it snapsinto place.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all thesein the proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminumwheel with a flat tire under yourvehicle for an extended periodof time or with the valve stempointing up can damage thewheel. Always stow the wheelwith the valve stem pointingdown and have the wheel/tirerepaired as soon as possible.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.


Vehicle Care 10-83

A. Hoist Assembly

B. Hoist Shaft

C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole


E. Wheel Wrench

F. Hoist Cable

G. Tire/Wheel Retainer

H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

J. Hoist End of Extension Tool

K. Spare Tire Lock

1. Put the tire (H) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down and tothe rear.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.Separate the tire/wheelretainer (G) from the guide pin.Pull the pin through the center ofthe wheel. Tilt the retainer downand through the center wheelopening.


10-84 Vehicle Care

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (D) and wheelwrench (E) as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (J) through the hole inthe rear bumper (I) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel and centered in thewheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrench totighten the cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.

10. Reinstall the hitch cover.


Vehicle Care 10-85

To store the tools:

A. Wheel Blocks

B. Tool Bag with Jack Tools

C. Retaining Bracket

D. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Bag

E. Jack

F. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

G. Jack Knob

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench,jack handle, and jack handleextensions) to the tool bag (B).

2. Assemble wheel blocks (A)and jack (E) together with thewing nut (F).

3. Position the jack (E) and wheelblocks (A) in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob (G) clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sureto position the holes in the baseof the jack onto the pin in themounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket (C) tofasten the tool bag (B) on thestud and turn the wing nut (D)clockwise to secure.

Regular Wheelbase shown,Extended Wheelbase similar.

6. Return the storage tray to itsoriginal stored position.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has anunderbody-mounted tirehoist assembly equippedwith a secondary latch system.It is designed to stop the sparetire from suddenly falling off yourvehicle. For the secondary latch towork, the spare must be installedwith the valve stem pointing down.See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑75.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failureto read and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

1. Check under the vehicle to seeif the cable end is visible. If thecable is not visible proceed toStep 6.

2. If it is visible, first try to tightenthe cable by turning the wheelwrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten thecable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning thewrench counterclockwise threeor four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at leasttwo times. If the spare tirelowers to the ground, continuewith Step 5 under “Removing theSpare Tire and Tools” under TireChanging on page 10‑75.

5. If the spare does not lower, turnthe wrench counterclockwiseuntil approximately 15 cm (6 in)of cable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on theirshortest ends, with the backsfacing each other.


Vehicle Care 10-87

7. Place the bottom edge of thejack (A) on the wheel blocks (B),separating them so that the jackis balanced securely.

8. Attach the jack handle,extension, and wheel wrench tothe jack and place it (with thewheel blocks) under the vehicletoward the front of the rearbumper.

9. Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of thespare tire.

10. Turn the wrench clockwise toraise the jack until it lifts theend fitting.

11. Continue raising the jack untilthe spare tire stops movingupward and is held firmly inplace. The secondary latchhas released and the sparetire is balancing on the jack.


10-88 Vehicle Care

12. Lower the jack byturning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jackor is hanging by the cable.

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handlefrom the jack and carefullyremove the jack. Use one handto push against the spare whilefirmly pulling the jack out fromunder the spare tire with theother hand.

If the spare tire is hangingfrom the cable, insert the hoistend of extension, and wheelwrench into the hoist shafthole in the bumper and turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto lower the spare the rest ofthe way.

14. Turn the wheel wrench in thehoist shaft hole in the bumperclockwise to raise the cableback up if the cable is hangingunder the vehicle.

Have the hoist assembly inspectedas soon as you can. You will notbe able to store a spare or flat tireusing the hoist assembly until it hasbeen inspected and/or replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire,see “Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” underTire Changing on page 10‑75.

Full-Size Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had afully-inflated spare tire. A sparetire may lose air over time, socheck its inflation pressure regularly.See Tire Pressure on page 10‑57and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑24 for information regardingproper tire inflation and loading yourvehicle. For instruction on how toremove, install or store a spare tire,see “Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” and“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑75.


Vehicle Care 10-89

After installing the spare tire onyour vehicle, you should stop assoon as possible and make surethe spare is correctly inflated. Thespare tire is made to perform wellat speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h)at the recommended inflationpressure, so you can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced as soon as youcan and installed back onto yourvehicle. This way, a spare tire willbe available in case you need itagain. Do not mix tires and wheelsof different sizes, because they willnot fit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑30.


If the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damageto the vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Notice: Only use vehicles with12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start yourvehicle. If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission in

N (Neutral) before setting theparking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethat the transfer case is in adrive gear, not in N (Neutral).

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all the lamps that are notneeded. This avoids sparks andhelps save both batteries. And itcould save the radio!

4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) jump startingterminal and a remotenegative (−) jump startingterminal. You should always usethese remote terminals insteadof the terminals on the battery.

If the vehicle has a remotepositive (+) terminal, it is locatedunder a red plastic cover at thepositive battery post. To uncoverthe remote positive (+) terminal,open the red plastic cover.


Vehicle Care 10-91

The remote negative (−) terminalis a stud located on the rightfront of the engine, where thenegative battery cable attaches.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on the location of theremote positive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.


10-92 Vehicle Care

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because thiscan cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+)terminal of the vehicle withthe dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine partor to the remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the remotenegative (−) terminal, on thevehicle with the dead battery.

10. Now start the vehicle withthe good battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle thathad the dead battery. If it willnot start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


Vehicle Care 10-93

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each otheror other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the bad battery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+)terminal cover, if the vehicle hasone, to its original position.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage,the disabled vehicle shouldbe towed with all four wheelsoff the ground. Care must betaken with vehicles that havelow ground clearance and/orspecial equipment.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑10.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Recreational vehicle towingmeans towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as “dinghy towing”(towing the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing the vehicle withtwo wheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known as a“dolly”).

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


Vehicle Care 10-95

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Dinghy and Dolly Towing

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drivevehicle with all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow an all-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheelson the ground.

All-wheel-drive vehicles are notdesigned to be towed with anywheels on the ground. If the vehiclemust be towed, see Towing YourVehicle previously.

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If a two-wheel-drivevehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow a two-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground. Two-wheel-drive


10-96 Vehicle Care

transmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drivevehicle, the vehicle must be towedwith the rear wheels on the dolly.See “Dolly Towing (Rear WheelsOff the Ground)” following.

Dolly Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground)

Notice: If a two-wheel-drivevehicle is towed with the rearwheels on the ground, the

transmission could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Nevertow the vehicle with the rearwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles shouldnot be towed with the rear wheelson the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

Dolly Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround)

Use the following procedure todinghy tow a two-wheel-drivevehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.


Vehicle Care 10-97

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑46.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstripswill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a cleancloth. During very cold, dampweather frequent application maybe required. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑7.

Washing the Vehicle

The best way to preserve thevehicle's finish is to keep it cleanby washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicle

or damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight. Use a car washingsoap. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based or thatcontain acid or abrasives, as theycan damage the paint, metal orplastic on the vehicle. Approvedcleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. Follow allmanufacturers' directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.


10-98 Vehicle Care

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 12 inches (30 cm) tothe surface of the vehicle. Use ofpower washers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can taketheir toll over a period of years.To help keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Washing with water is all thatis usually needed. However, chromepolish may be used on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.


Vehicle Care 10-99

Windshield, Backglass, andWiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldand backglass with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when you clean theblades. Bugs, road grime, sapand a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels and Trim

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damagedif the vehicle is not washedafter driving on roads that havebeen sprayed with magnesium,calcium or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash thevehicle's chrome with soap andwater after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surfaceof the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasivepolishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive


10-100 Vehicle Care

cleaning brushes on them becausethey could damage the surface.Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automaticcar wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's bodyand paint shop.

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.


Vehicle Care 10-101

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of theframe should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.

Dirt packed in close areas of theframe should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 monthsor 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Although not always visible, dustand dirt can accumulate on theupholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particlesfrom the upholstery. It is important tokeep the upholstery from becomingand remaining heavily soiled. Soilsshould be removed as quickly aspossible. The vehicle's interior mayexperience extremes of heat thatcould cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to homefurnishings may also transfer colorto the vehicle's interior.


10-102 Vehicle Care

When cleaning the vehicle's interior,only use cleaners specificallydesigned for the surfaces beingcleaned. Permanent damagemay result from using cleanerson surfaces for which they werenot intended. Use glass cleaneronly on glass. Remove anyaccidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To preventover-spray, apply cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents thatmay become concentrated in thevehicle's breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors fromthe vehicle's upholstery and cleanthe vehicle's glass can be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:. A knife or any other sharp object

to remove a soil from any interiorsurface.

. A stiff brush. It can causedamage to the vehicle's interiorsurfaces.

. Heavy pressure or aggressiverubbing with a cleaning cloth.Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

. Laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residuethat streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per gallon (3.78 L)of water is a good guide. Useonly mild, neutral-pH soaps.

. Too much cleaner that saturatesthe upholstery.

. Organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc. that candamage the vehicle's interior.


Vehicle Care 10-103

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment frequently toremove dust and loose dirt.A canister vacuum with a beater barin the nozzle may only be used onfloor carpet and carpeted floor mats.For any soil, always try to remove itfirst with plain water or club soda.Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible usingone of the following techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to removeexcess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plainwater.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner orspot lifter is to be used, test a smallhidden area for colorfastness first.If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation mayresult, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisture fromthe fabric or carpet.

Leather

Leather, and lighter colored leatherin particular, will need more frequentcleaning to prevent the buildup ofdust, dirt, and colors transferredfrom other items so that these donot become permanent stains.

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can beused. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution canbe used. Your dealer has a GMapproved leather cleaner availablethat provides superior cleaningperformance when used regularlyon finished automotive leathers.Allow the leather to dry naturally.


10-104 Vehicle Care

Do not use heat, steam, spot liftersor spot removers, or shoe polish onleather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that aresold to preserve and protectleather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of theleather and are not recommended.Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean thevehicle's interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

TEHAMA™ Leather

The leather surface on the seat wasnot designed to be aggressivelycleaned using any commercialproduct. Use a well wrung clothdampened with water to removedust. Do not use a wet cloth orsaturated the leather surface with

water. Allow the leather to drynaturally. If a soil occurs that cannotbe completely removed, allow it tobecome part of the natural markingsof the leather. The leather in thevehicle was designed to have anatural appearance and develop amore vintage appearance with use.

Do not use heat to dry. Never usesteam to clean leather. Never usespot lifters or spot removers onleather. It is very important notto use any commercial leathercleaners and coatings that aresold to preserve and protect leather.Not only are those products notnecessary, they will permanentlyand adversely change theappearance and feel of the leather.Never use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean thevehicle's interior. Never useshoe polish on leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl andother Plastic Surfaces

A soft cloth dampened with watermay be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot liftersor removers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.


Vehicle Care 10-105

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Wood Panels

Use a clean cloth moistened inwarm, soapy water (use mild dishwashing soap). Dry the woodimmediately with a clean cloth.

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be able

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

to provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


10-106 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10

General InformationNotice: Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary tokeep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage causedby failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section.We recommend having yourdealer perform these services.Proper vehicle maintenance helpsto keep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑24.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Are driven off-road in therecommended manner. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 9‑7.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑64.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician dothe work. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can becertain that you will receive thehighest level of service available.Your dealer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipmentto ensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑64.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter.See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.An Emission Control Service.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, service isrequired for the vehicle as soon aspossible, within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmight not indicate the need forvehicle service for more than a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.Your dealer has trained servicetechnicians who will performthis work and reset the system.



If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

When the Change Engine Oil Soonmessage displays, certain services,checks, and inspections arerequired.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.An Emission Control Service.

. Engine coolant level check.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑18.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑97. Wornor damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑35.

. Tire inflation pressurescheck. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑64.

. Rotate tires if necessary.See Tire Rotation onpage 10‑64.

. Fluids visual leak check(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repairedand the fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.

. Brake system inspection(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Lubricate the front suspension,steering linkage, and parkingbrake cable guides. Control armball joints are maintenance‐free.



. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspectionfor damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Body hinges and latches,key lock cylinders, rearcompartment hinges, outertailgate handle pivot points,and folding seat hardwarelubrication. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑7. More frequentlubrication may be requiredwhen the vehicle is exposedto a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean clothmakes them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑38.

. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should

be rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑64.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.. Engine coolant level check.

See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑18.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

Once a Month. Tire inflation pressures check.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑64.

. Sunroof track and sealinspection, if equipped.See Sunroof on page 2‑22.



Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑33.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑34.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑34.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑35.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Hood and liftgate support gasstrut inspection for signs ofwear, corrosion, cracks, lossof lubricant, or other damage.Check the hold open abilityof the gas strut. If necessary,replace with genuine parts fromyour dealer.

. Underbody flushing service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.

. Automatic transmission fluid andfilter change (severe service)for vehicles mainly driven inheavy city traffic in hot weather,in hilly or mountainous terrain,when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi,police, or delivery service.See Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑12.

. All‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (severeservice) for vehicles mainlydriven when frequently towinga trailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. Checkvent hose at transfer case forkinks and proper installation.Check to be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris. During any maintenance,if a power washer is used toclean mud and dirt from theunderbody, care should be takento not directly spray the transfercase output seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.



. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed.An Emission Control Service.The U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency or theCalifornia Air ResourcesBoard has determined thatthe failure to perform thismaintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty orlimit recall liability prior to thecompletion of the vehicle'suseful life. We, however,urge that all recommendedmaintenance services beperformed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid and

filter change (normal service).See Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑12.

. All‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (normalservice). Check vent hose attransfer case for kinks andproper installation. Check to besure vent hose is unobstructed,clear, and free of debris. Duringany maintenance, if a powerwasher is used to clean mudand dirt from the underbody,care should be taken to notdirectly spray the transfer caseoutput seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfer

case fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection.An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or every fiveyears, whichever occurs first).See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑18. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine drive belts inspectionfor fraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage (or every10 years, whichever occursfirst). Replace, if needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oilsmeeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑18.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front and Rear AxleSAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer Case DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Body Door Hinge Pins, TailgateHinge and Linkage, Folding Seats,

and Fuel Door Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot PointsMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Weatherstrip SqueaksSynthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified here by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15908916 A3086C

Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades

Front – 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 25820122 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in theVIN is the engine code.This code identifies the vehicle'sengine, specifications, andreplacement parts. See “EngineSpecifications” under Capacitiesand Specifications on page 12‑2for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning RefrigerantFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 16.7 L 17.6 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L† 6.0 qt†

Fuel Tank

Regular 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Extended 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Replacement) 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Transfer Case Fluid 1.4 L 1.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid after filling.†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

6.2LV8 F Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing



12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Service(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-12Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-18OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-19Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure(U.S. and Canada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss yourconcern with a member ofdealership management. Normally,concerns can be quickly resolvedat that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with thesales, service or parts manager,contact the owner of the dealershipor the general manager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theCadillac Customer AssistanceCenter at 1‐800‐458‐8006.In Canada, call the CanadianCadillac Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to giveyour inquiry prompt attention. Havethe following information availableto give the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title,or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Cadillac,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two,you can file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairsor the interpretation of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Althoughyou may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution programprior to filing a court action, use ofthe program is free of charge and

your case will generally be heardwithin 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed withany other venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that youdo not feel your concerns havebeen addressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargemediation/arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involvedby an impartial third party arbiter,and may include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, orcall the General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with your newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.



Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of yourvehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.However, we recognize thatdespite the good intentions of allparties involved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to the dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. Theyare interested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or thedealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address



See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Cadillac encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-882-1112

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0805Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0805

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].



Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0816

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0816

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8195

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Cadillac bydialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Cadillac OwnerCenter (U.S.) —www.cadillacownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Store online service and

maintenance records

. Cadillac dealer locator forservice nationwide

. Exclusive privileges and offers

. Recall notices for your specificvehicle

. OnStar and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links:

Cadillac — www.cadillac.com

Cadillac Merchandise —www.cadillaccollection.com

Help Center — www.cadillac.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

My GM Canada — www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.



Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quicklinks to parts and serviceestimates, check trade-invalues, or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canadaalso has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Service(U.S. and Canada)In the United States or Canada,call 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,call 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.



Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN),and delivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Service is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Service program atany time without notification.

Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow tothe nearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.



. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is yourresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it isnot covered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requestedeither with the most directroute or the most scenic route.Additional travel informationis also available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefitsand Service: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursedduring the 5 years/160 000 km (100,000miles)Powertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. only)

Cadillac's exceptional RoadsideService is more than an auto clubor towing service. It provides everyCadillac owner in the United Stateswith the advantage of contactinga Cadillac advisor and, whereavailable, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-siteservice.

A dealer technician will travel toyour location within a 30 mileradius of a participating Cadillacdealership. If beyond this radius, wewill arrange to have your car towedto the nearest Cadillac dealership.Each technician travels with aspecially equipped service vehiclecomplete with the necessaryCadillac parts and tools requiredto handle most roadside repairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.



. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, anda copy of the repair orders arerequired. Once authorizationhas been received, theRoadside Service advisor willhelp you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideService advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service.You will receive payment,up to $100, after sending theoriginal receipt to RoadsideService. Mechanical failures maybe covered, however any costfor parts and labor for repairsnot covered by the warrantyare the owner responsibility.

Roadside Service(Mexico)Roadside Service is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

For detailed information aboutRoadside Service, please seethe brochure provided withyour new vehicle or visit ourwebsite at: www.cadillac.com.mx.Navigate the site and click on“Asistencia en el Camino.” E-mailcorrespondence should be sentto: [email protected].

To contact Roadside Service byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0805

United States

1-866-466-8906

Canada

1-800-268-6800

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contactyour dealer and request anappointment. By schedulinga service appointment andadvising your service consultantof your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper to Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties inboth the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unable towait, GM helps to minimize yourinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, your dealercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used insteadof the dealer's shuttle service,the expense must be supportedby original receipts and can onlybe up to the maximum amountallowed by GM for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange toprovide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse youfor a rental vehicle that youobtain if your vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local,and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements varyand may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and mayalso be responsible for taxes,levies, usage fees, excessivemileage, or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be availableat every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time andto resolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved ina collision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired bya qualified technician using theproper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish yourvehicle's resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts arenew parts made with the samematerials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle'sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are madeby companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your

vehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty,and any vehicle failure related tosuch parts is not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage.There are significant differencesin the quality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure thatyour vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverageis not available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.



If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, and

telephone number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, and

telephone number. Vehicle license plate number. Vehicle make, model, and

model year. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Insurance company and policy

number. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑46.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take anactive role in its repair. If you havea pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specifyto the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional,and insist on Genuine GM parts.



Remember, if your vehicle is leased,you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GMparts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choicesas long as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a group

of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding howa vehicle's systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying dataroutinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as partof GM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.



OnStar®

If your vehicle is equipped withan active OnStar system, thatsystem may also record data incrash or near crash‐like situations.The OnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit,at www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), orby pressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See Using theNavigation System on page 7‑60 forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting,and in-vehicle transmitters forgarage door openers. RFIDtechnology in GM vehicles doesnot use or record personalinformation or link with any otherGM system containing personalinformation.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to anyof these systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Active Fuel Management™ . . . . 9-38Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-53

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-46

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-42AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-30, 9-45AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10AntennaRear Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-38

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Audio PlayersCD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-58Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-3

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-40Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-35Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-30Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-41Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-64Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-59Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CDDVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-18CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-34

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-63

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-72, 3-75Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6


INDEX i-3

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83Continuous DampingControl (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-18Database CoverageExplanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Destination, Navigation . . . . . . . . 7-69Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-30, 9-45

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-20If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-23Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21


i-4 INDEX

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

DVDRear SeatEntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33, 7-43

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Cooling System Messages . . .5-33Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-39Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-18Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-5

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

FilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-8Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-105FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26


INDEX i-5

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Front Fog LampsLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-66Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-65Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-64Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-38Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64Requirements, California . . . . .9-64System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Fuel EconomyDriving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-50Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Global PositioningSystem (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-8Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-6Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-25


i-6 INDEX

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-58Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-20Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-2

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-35Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-52Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-6Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.)Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-24Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-6Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-23Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8MenuConfigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-83

MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-38Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Messages (cont.)Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Object Detection System . . . . .5-36Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-37Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28


i-8 INDEX

NNavigationDestination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60

Navigation SystemVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Object Detection, Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-55

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-35

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-38Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-48

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-35Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

Problems with RouteGuidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2


INDEX i-9

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-6Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

Rear SeatEntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33, 7-43Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-58

Rear SeatsHeated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Rear Side Window Antenna . . . 7-18Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-59Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6

Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-54Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-17General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Road Sensing Suspension . . .9-50

Road Sensing Suspension . . . . 9-50Roadside Service . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-10RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39


i-10 INDEX

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-39Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-36

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-17General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-8Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3

Seats (cont.)Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10, 3-13Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Second Row Seats . . . . . . 3-10, 3-13Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-86Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72, 3-75

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-52

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-23StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-33Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


INDEX i-11

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSymbols, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64SystemRoof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

System Needs Service, If . . . . . . 7-98

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-60Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-59Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Secondary Latch System . . . 10-86Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-71When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-71Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-70Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-94Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94

TractionRoad Sensing Suspension . . .9-50

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8


i-12 INDEX

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-54Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-50Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50

UpdatesMap Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-98

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vehicle Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99

WWarning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-40

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-62Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-35WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

cadillac escalade/escalade esv owner manual - …...cadillac escalade/escalade esv owner manual -...

Documents